Home

NETCLOCK TIME SERVER 9300 SERIES

1. Main Menu Mozilla Firefox zoli File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help 2 E gt S GY bts 10 10 2 103 eg bin main cgi lal gt Glz cooge a D SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations Radius server 1 aj HostName IPV4 IPv6 Secret Key Port fisi2 Timeout fio Radius server 2 HostName IPV4 IPv6 Secret Key Port fisi2 Timeout fio Radius server 3 HostName IPV4 IPv6 Secret Key Port fisi2 Timeout fio Radius server 4 HostName IP V4 IPv6 Secret Key Port fisi2 Timeout fio Radius server 5 HostName IPV4 IPy6 Secret Key Port fisi2 Timeout fio General setting for all radius servers Re transmit Attemps 0 0 to 3 zl m interface See Relay e Status amp Loq Copyrights Spectracom Corporation All right resend Contact us Done 10 10 2 103 amp Ui Figure 3 86 Security RADIUS Client Configuration Screen From the Security RADIUS Client Configuration screen Figure 3 86 the user identifies the addresses of the network s RADIUS servers From this screen the user also specifies the number of re transmit attempts 0 to 3 that will be made in communicating with the RADIUS server 3 100 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 3 4 22 Configuring IPSec Internet Protocol Security IPSec is a suite of IP protocols that authenticates and encrypts network communications IPSec sup
2. Time Offset lt Seconds 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 fi 10000 20068 30006 40008 50006 60080 79006 89000 Time Of Day UTC Seconds NTP Reference Status Auth Last Poll Delay Offset Jitter Status Sec py Reach ms mS mS Host Ref ID Stratum Mode Type INTPIinterface System Relay Securiy Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us R10 7 4 Figure 3 33 NTP Status Screen NOTE The NTP Reference Status lines bear different colors for different codes Red is a reject the peer is discarded as unreachable Yellow is an outlyer the peer is discarded by the clustering algorithm Green is a candidate the peer is a survivor and a candidate for the combining or a syspeer ppspeer the peer has been declared the system peer and lends its variables to the system variables 3 4 2 NTP Support Spectracom cannot provide technical assistance for configuring and installing NTP on Unix based applications Please refer to www ntp org for NTP information and FAQs Another good source for support is the Internet newsgroup at news comp protocols time ntp 3 28 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series Spectracom can provide support for the Windows NT Windows 2000 and Windows XP time synchronization Refer to the Spectracom Web page www spectracomcorp com for more information or contact Spectracom Technical Support by p
3. Contact us Source IP AH SPI in Hex Algorithm key In ASCII CT Pecos E 0 Pecos 2 Pcs a a CE Pecos E 2 Pvc a I 0 rr a _ e __ reac Tid a a CO i imes a C SA __ e _ a D m a E ri ___ e i _ a C CO i imes A e a j ed ee ee ed a NN CLL E e ee a Pcs E o ee ed ee ee et 8 Pecos E o e n a HMACMDS e Fa Done 10 10 2 103 amp Figure 3 90 IPSec Manual SA Configuration 1 of 2 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series The Security Parameter Index SPI must be a hexadecimal number without the Ox prefix Enter the desired values manually NOTE SPI values between 0 and 255 are reserved and cannot be used at this time Make sure to check the AH or ESP boxes for the key configurations used If the appropriate box is not checked information following the AH or ESP inputs will be ignored by the update page Main Menu Mozilla Firefox File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help lO x S gt S Go tps 10 10 2 103 cg bin main cgi amp gt Cl coogle e9 O SPECTRACOM ynchronizing Critical Operations You have logged in as admin al Ti SES EYEE
4. net net COMMAND Arguments sys sys COMMAND Arguments ser ser COMMAND SERIAL Arguments rem rem COMMAND REMOTE Arguments irig irig COMMAND ARG frq frgq COMMAND INDEX Arguments E admin 10 10 128 40 gt E Figure 3 9 Available CLI Commands NetClock Instruction Manual 3 7 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Initial configuration settings can be modified subsequently through either the serial port or the Web UI The values entered in the following fields are specific to your setup Your network administrator may assign and provide some or all of the required information If you are not using DHCP in conjunction with DNS using domain names rather than IP addresses the IP address of the NetClock must be changed from the factory default to the new static address for your particular network before the NetClock can be accessed through the Web UI and before it can provide NTP time stamps to synchronize the network Figure 3 10 Serial Port Pin Configuration PIN SIGNAL O DESCRIPTION __ 2 RXD_ _ O Receive Data RS 232 output data to PC 3 TxD _ Transmit Data RS 232 input data from PC 5 GND Signal Common 6 DSR O Data Set Ready 8 STS Clearto Send Table 3 1 Serial Setup Cable Pin Outs 3 8 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 3 2 2 Initial Network Setup 9300 Series At the CLI enter the command net
5. Main Menu Mozilla Firefox File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help gt S GB LO https 10 10 2 103 eg bin main cgi Sla Gle coogle q You have logged in as admin The SNMP agent is currently Enabled SNMP v1 v2 Users IPv4 IPv6 Protocol Permission Community IPv4 Network Access IPv6 Network Access m o p a Read J pubic i tk D OM Ged M A E S 0 Bl None TT DO Gey None FO olo None al SNMP v3 Users Auth Type Auth Passphrase Priv Type Priv Passphrase Noe ed Prone ey None J None None J None BY None j None None J None BY SNMP Notification Destinations P Dest IP Engine ID Aut Version User Community Version Dest IP Port SNMPv3 Typ E z trap Pa z homma a 10 10 10 1 for SSdY 62 i None v3 z Pea z E None x 4 gt NTP EEN SE EE E EEE Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Dane 10 10 2108 amp 4 Figure 3 79 SNMP Security Screen 1 of 3 3 4 20 Configuring SNMP v1 v2 and v3 From the SNMP Security screen Figure 3 79 the user can define the network locations hostnames and protocols used in communicating with SNMP v1 v2 and v3 users SNMP v3 is secure SNMP NOTE Usernames are arbitrary The username must be the s
6. NTP Peer Statistics NOTE 1 Files are sent to the remote server 30 minutes into every hour NOTE 2 Remote file names will be appended with a UTC date stamp YYYYMMDD Submit Reset NTP interface System Relay Security status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Done 10 10 2103 amp Figure 3 32 Statistics FTP Screen NetClock Instruction Manual 3 27 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation The NTP Status screen Figure 3 33 provides statistics and a graphical representation of various NTP statistics relevant to the NetClock s function This includes whether the NetClock is time synchronized its stratum level the location of its selected reference its delay offset and jitter and statuses for defined timing references on the network Main Menu Windows Internet Explorer 5 x Ge v O https 10 10 2 101 egi bin main cgi 0 Certificate Error 4 X Google Pir Eile Edit View Favorites Tools Help Google G zop Bix Bookmarksy gt gt Q settingsy BQ 7 Ve dt Main Menu A A y my y pag y G Tools y y br amp 3 D S PE CT RA COM You have logged in as admin ynchronizing Critical Operations NTP Status Offset Graph ra72007 E Time Offset Refresh Graph j Taa Offset Status In Sync Stratum 1 Selected Reference Delay 0 000 mS Offset 0 001 mS Jitter 0 004 mS T T T Time Offset GPS
7. Table 2 2 Serial Port Pin Assignments NetClock Instruction Manual 2 1 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 2 8 2 RS 485 Remote Port The NetClock has two remote ports labeled RS 485 PORT 1 and RS 485 PORT 2 These outputs provide a continuous once per second time data stream in the selected Data Format Two input time Data Formats five output time Data Format selections and one position data stream in NMEA 0183 format are available Refer to Section 6 for a complete description of the Data Format structures In addition to Data Formats baud rate and UTC time difference of each output is selectable A 3 position terminal block is supplied in the ancillary kit for each of the Remote Connections Also included in the ancillary kit is a jeweler s type screwdriver to tighten the screws Connector pin assignments are shown in Figure 2 6 RS 485 REMOTE PORT 1 PORT 2 Figure 2 6 Remote Outputs RS 485 is a balanced differential transmission requiring twisted pair cabling RS 485 characteristics make it ideal to distribute time data throughout a facility Each Remote Output can provide time to 32 devices at cable lengths up to 4 000 feet Refer to the RS 485 Output diagram for a schematic representation of each RS 485 output driver Relative to RS 485 specifications the A terminal Pin 2 is negative with respect to the B terminal Pin 1 for a mark or binary 1 The A terminal is positive to the B terminal for a space or
8. fared A psec E Require J m Require T fae in psec TS Require E m Require E fan fe psec Requie EY 7 Requie 2 De Fee eee Drea Dd w A psec TS Require E m Require fae A psec Require E 7 Require fared Pn psec E Require J m Require fae A psec TS Require E 7 Require E fan A psec Requie EY P Requie 2 fan fied psec i Requie EY m Requie 7 w A psec TS Require E 7 Require fae in psec TS Require E O Require E i m interface See Relay Security Status amp Log Copyright Ds spectracom Corporation AII rights resend Contact us Done 10 10 2103 4 Figure 3 89 IPSec General Screen Select ANY as the desired protocol to apply for IPSec security protection unless a specific protocol is desired these can be selected from the drop down list Select Both for the Direction which means IPSec security protection is required for both incoming and outgoing packets Security protection may also be applied to incoming packets only or to outgoing packets only from the drop down list Select Ipsec to use IPSec as the security policy You may also select None or Discard Selecting None means that IPSec operation will not take place on the packet while selecting Discard means the packet matching indexes will be discar
9. 1 6 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series Programmable Timer Output 128 On Off events available Timer events that are hourly daily or weekly only count as a single event so many events can be programmed Major Minor Alarms Relay contacts allow remote monitoring of operational status A power failure CPU failure loss of time sync etc cause the alarm relay to de energize The alarm relay returns to normal operation energized when the fault condition is corrected 1 5 8 IRIG Output Signal Selectable IRIG B or IRIG E amplitude modulated sine wave AM or pulse width coded TTL DCLS AM Carrier IRIG B 1000 Hz IRIG E 100 Hz or 1000 Hz AM Signal Level Adjustable from O to 10 Vp p mark amplitude into loads of 600 ohms Factory set to 2 0 V p p into 600 ohms Output should be terminated with 600 ohms Accuracy IRIG B IRIG E 1000 Hz AM 20 microseconds of UTC IRIG E 100 Hz AM 200 microseconds of UTC IRIG B IRIG E TTL DCLS 2 microseconds of UTC Connector BNC female Configuration IRIG Formats B or E in AM or TTL DCLS levels Time data is configurable with Time Zone Offsets and DST rules Signature Control may also be placed on the output signal This feature removes the modulation code from the IRIG output whenever the selected alarm condition is present The output is restored when the fault is corrected IRIG Code Format Description of code IRIG B TTL BCD CF and SBS IRIG
10. During periods of Daylight Saving Time for the selected DST schedule During the 24 hour period preceding the change out of DST The leap second indicator L is defined as Space When a leap second correction is not scheduled at the end of the month L When a leap second correction is scheduled at the months end 56 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series Example 0003 20010415 124536 0500D The example data stream provides the following information Data Format 3 Sync Status Time Synchronized to GPS Date April 15 2001 Time 12 45 36 EDT Eastern Daylight Time The time difference is 5 hours behind UTC Leap Second No leap second is scheduled for this month 5 5 Format 4 Format 4 provides a format indicator time synchronization status character modified Julian date time reflecting UTC with 0 1 millisecond resolution and a leap second indicator Format 4 data structure is shown below FFFFIMJDXX HHMMSS SSSSAL CR LF where FFFF Format Identifier 0004 Time Sync Status Space MJDXX Modified Julian Date HH Hours 00 23 UTC time MM Minutes 00 59 SS SSSS Seconds 00 0000 60 0000 L Leap Second Indicator L CR Carriage Return LF Line Feed The start bit of the first character marks the on time point of the data stream The time synchronization status character is defined as Space Whenever the front panel time synchronization lamp is gree
11. Hour Minute Second Millisecond Weekly MON k Day Hour Minute Second Millisecond Monthly M Day Hour Minute Second Milliseconds Yearly Jan Month fi Day 0 Hour 0 Minute 0 Second 0 Millisecond d Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us Done Internet Ui Figure 3 65 Edit View Event Timers Choose a Time Zone From the left menu select Set Event Clock Choose an already defined Clock Time Zone or define a new one 3 72 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series Note All times entered for the Event Timers will use the same Local System Clock reference for Time Zone and DST rules It is best to choose this reference first before entering your schedule Relay Select the relay number that the event is to be associated with Enabled Disabled Delete If the event is enabled the event will occur when scheduled If the event is disabled it will not occur at the scheduled time but will still appear in the list of scheduled events on the previous page If the event is deleted all fields of event are cleared and it is removed from all event lists ON OFF Each event can turn the specified event timer relay on or off The next section of the page describes when the event will occur and how often it will occur The relay can be set to occur hourly daily weekly monthly and yearly Hourly The event will happen
12. 55 6 Time Sync Status 56 7 Space 57 8 Space 58 9 Space 59 PID P6 Position Identifier 60 10 Years Units Y1 61 11 Years Units Y2 62 12 Years Units Y4 63 13 Years Units Y8 64 14 Space 65 15 Years Tens Y10 66 16 Years Tens Y20 67 17 Years Tens Y40 68 18 Years Tens Y80 69 PID P7 Position Identifier 70 19 Space 71 20 Space 72 21 Space 73 22 Space 74 23 Space 75 24 Space 76 25 Space 77 26 Space 78 27 Space Table 3 3 IRIG B Control Function Field 3 4 3 2 IRIG E Output The IRIG E code contains the Binary Coded Decimal BCD time of year and Control Functions Figure 3 40 illustrates the IRIG E data structure The BCD time of year provides the day of year 1 366 and time of day to tens of seconds The hour of the day is expressed in 24 hour format NetClock Instruction Manual 3 37 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation The Control Function field includes a time synchronization status bit year information and SBS time of day 1 Time frame 10 seconds 2 Code Digit Weighting Binary Coded Decimal time of year Code world 26 binary digits Tens of seconds minutes hours and days Recycles yearly 3 Code Word Structure BCD word tens of seconds digits begin at index count 6 Binary coded elements occur between position identifier elements Pg and Ps 3 for seconds 7 for minutes 6 for hours and 10 for days until the code word is complete An index marker occurs between decimal digits in each group to provide
13. Console Mode Client Mode ACTS Server Mode Submit Reset NTP interface Systom Relay Securty status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Done 10 10 50 20 amp 5 Figure 7 2 System Modem Configuration Screen Console Mode NetClock Instruction Manual 7 3 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation F Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer 0 x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help A Address htps 10 10 2 103 gi bin main cgi Bo la O SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations System time is significantly less accurate when time is obtained from Modem Dial Out The Command Line Interface console on the Serial Setup Port will be inaccessible while in client or server mode All other modem options will be disabled when in console mode Port Mode Client Mode z Client Mode Secondary Time Source z Baud 9600 Baud Modem speaker Off On F Dialout now Disabled due to time sync Reset NTP interface System Relay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Internet Figure 7 3 System Modem Configuration Screen Client Mode After selecting Client mode submitting the change and returning to the Modem Configuration screen the user may configure the modem through the Web UI Primary Secondary Time Source T
14. HTTP www chiark greenend org uk sgtatham putty 3 4 17 4 Configuring HTTPS The OpenSSL library provides the encryption algorithms used for secure HTTP HTTPS Figure 3 75 The OpenSSL package also provides tools and software which is used to create x509 Certificate Requests Self Signed Certificates and Private Public Keys The NetClock uses OpenSSL library with a simple GUI interface to create certificate Requests and self signed certificates Users can then send these certificate requests to an external Certificate Authority CA for the creation of a third party verifiable certificate or use an internal corporate CA If a Certificate Authority is not available the user can simply use the self signed certificate that comes with the unit until it expires or create their own self signed certificates to allow the use of HTTPS NOTE lf the IP Address or Common Name Host Name is changed you may wish to regenerate the security certificate Otherwise you may receive security warnings from your web browser Each Spectracom secure product comes with a default Spectracom self signed certificate which will outlast the product warranty The typical expiration of the certificate is about 10 years HTTPS is available using this certificate until this certificate expires If deleted however this certificate cannot be restored For more information on OpenSSL please see www openssl org The NetClock s software supports x509 DER and PEM and P7
15. It uses a secure key known to both endpoints allowing the recipient to compute the ICV as the sender has computed it If the recipient gets the same value the sender has effectively authenticated itself 3 4 22 4 IKE vs Manual Keys To communicate the devices at both endpoints must possess the same secure keys Keys can be entered manually They may also be generated dynamically between two hosts through Internet Key Exchange IKE The NetClock supports both IKE and manual keys 3 4 22 5 Main Mode vs Aggressive Mode The initial IKE exchange may be efficient or it may be secure This tradeoff is governed by the exchange mode Main or Aggressive Main mode is completely secure and requires six packets to be sent between the two devices Aggressive mode requires only three packets be sent between the two devices but it is less secure NOTE The NetClock supports both Main and Aggressive modes Aggressive mode is NOT recommended because of the security risks involved NetClock Instruction Manual 3 101 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 3 4 22 6 Configuring IPSec IKE SA To establish an IPSec connection between the Spectracom NetClock and an IPv4 addressed host A using IKE SA configuration we must first configure the IPSec IKE to communicate with host A To do this navigate to the IPSEC IKE SA Configuration screen Figure 3 87 Main Menu Mozilla Firefox lolx File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help e Q z
16. NetClock Instruction Manual 3 59 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 10 10 2 102 cqi bin main cgi You have logged in as admin Active Option I Activate Option Select z with Activation Key Rollback Configuration Firmware This may take several minutes Note Reboot is required for activating option and rollback Submit Reset M EE E SN SET Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us lone lip internet Figure 3 55 System Update Screen 3 60 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 3 4 11 Rebooting the System The system can be rebooted from the System Reboot screen Figure 3 56 Simply click the Reboot Now button and wait for the NetClock to reboot Main Menu Mozilla Firefox i o x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help o i gt KJ tt https 10 10 2 101 cgi bin main cgi SM gt Id Google IS D SPECT RACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations Caution If you restore factory defaults ALL user configurations will lost and the IP will be assigned by DHCP Record your user settings before selecting reboot or halt l Restore Factory Defaults Caution If you installed any updates reboots may take longer than expected Reboot
17. Off No link established Blink is defined as second on 1 2 second off Flash is defined as 1 2 second on 1 29 second off Table 1 2 Status Indicators Rear Panel TIMER ALARM RELAYS 1 2 and 3 are configurable for remote alerts and monitoring The GPS ANTENNA connection is an N type connector for the GPS input from the antenna The POWER connector is the input for the DC power The CHASSIS GROUND connector provides a means of grounding the unit NetClock Instruction Manual 1 3 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 1 4 Warranty Information and Customer Support Warranty information is found on the leading pages of this manual Spectracom constantly strives to improve its products We greatly appreciate any and all customer feedback Technical support is available by telephone at US 1 585 321 5800 Please direct any comments or questions regarding application operation or service to Spectracom s Customer Service Department Customer Service is available Monday through Friday from 8 00 a m to 5 00 p m EST excluding holidays Product support is also available by e mail Questions regarding equipment operation and applications may be e mailed to Spectracom Sales Support at sales spectracomcorp com For repairs and technical support questions may be e mailed to Spectracom Technicians at techsupport spectracomcorp com Visit Spectracom s web page for product information application notes and upgrade notices
18. Spectracom Corporation IRIG B Output 3 4 3 1 sunoy pz Alene sajohoes apoo euq zyres y sjuewaje papos Areulq y0 pue y6 OU UBEMjaq s no20 JayNUEp UOIIsOd y S41 Bunnooo wip yueoy uBis see ay y m Spuozes u ep jo aw au 3416 sUBIp ueazuanas Pd pue 8d S4auap uonisod UseMjeq S1NDD0 psom epod ep jo wn gS Heug yyfrens y L alge Plal4 UoRoUN 01 4U09 au UO p yu p S JUBLUA a 01 U09 yoey sawed aul zo saqwunu payloads Aue Buunp auo Aueuiq e peal o powweih oad q UBD SJUBWAJa UONOUN jouoo JO UONEUIQWIOD JO puawaja UOHOUN jo1uoo Auy d pue g suayquep UONIsod UseMjeq 1N990 SUO JOUN jo4JUCD UA S JU ML opm idue Xe E 4 epnyjdwe aoeds ZHOOOL AONJNOJY4 YSINYVD VNDIS G3LVINGOW IANLNANY SNOILONNJ TOULNOD SGNOOAS AYYNIG LHDIVYLS AVG 40 AWIL SuVaA ge6 Sp I o6 S l 3 SERRA RARRRRRRN BERRA wana a Aueak s j 1 apoo qog SUL JSIY SINDDO Hip jUBDYIUBIs sea ay UONNIOSEJ pensia 10 uopesedas apIAoid o puomaqns yoee u s I6Ip jewoap ay UBEMjeq S1NDDO JayJEW XBPU UY 9 9 GWOD S PIOM poo y RUN SAep 10 04 SINOY 104 9 seyNuIW 10 Z SpUCd aS 10 7 d pue g s191 U p uonisod usamjaq ind00 syu w j p omqns pepoo reuiq y unos x pu je Buluuibeq syiBip 0E Jo S sisuod POM p09 1e9 Jo ewn GO ewoep papos euq ay L s u w J e 104 JUIOd aoUaJaJaI WY UO sdd QO eu s 6p Bulpee y sw 0 G Jo UONEINp e sey euUO Ar
19. Synchronizing Critical Operations NTP interface System Relay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us https 10 10 2 103 cgi bin menuntp cgi 10 10 2 103 amp Figure 3 26 Web UI NTP Menu NetClock Instruction Manual 3 19 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Network Time Protocol NTP and Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP are client server protocols for synchronizing time on IP networks NTP provides greater accuracy and error checking than does SNTP NTP and SNTP can be used to synchronize the time on any computer equipment compatible with the Network Time Protocol This includes CISCO routers and switches UNIX machines and Windows machines with suitable clients To synchronize a single workstation several freeware or shareware NTP clients are available on the Internet The software running on the PC determines whether NTP or SNTP is used Main Menu Mozilla Firefox File Edit View History Bookmarks gt Tools Help GQ https 10 10 2 101 cgi bin main cgi S gt Gleg g SPECTRACOM Synchronizing Critical Operations You have logged in as admin NTP Service Enabled Disabled NTP Broadcasting I NTP Broadcast every 6 1m 4s z Use MDS authentication with trusted key ID None z NTP Access M Service all IPv4 requests by default I Require Authentication for
20. indicates there was a short in the cable at the time of power up Antenna NV means an unknown antenna problem existed at power up GPS amp Antenna means that both GPS receiver and Antenna problems were detected at power up GPS Antenna Sense The GPS Antenna Sense is a current status of the antenna antenna cable and the GPS receiver If the antenna cable is currently not connected shorted or open and or if there is a problem with the GPS receiver or antenna or both this test will indicate FAILED Antenna UC means the antenna is not currently connected and Antenna OC indicates a short in the cable Antenna NV means an unknown antenna problem GPS amp Antenna means that both GPS receiver and Antenna problems were detected Modem Test Applicable only to units with Option 03 installed The Modem Test will indicate Console Mode if the Serial Setup Interface is set to Console mode instead of Client mode This indicates that the modem is not currently being used If the modem feature is desired in the modem configuration page change the mode to Client Mode When the NetClock initially boots up the mode is set to Serial Setup Interface When the mode is set to Modem and before every modem dial out call the modem is sent a command If the unit gets a response from the modem the field is set to PASSED If the unit gets no response or a bad response from the modem then the field is set to FAILED an
21. y yuawaj SW Og puov s y Jo eHpe upea y d pue d syuawaja uonisod uaam q N2900 syu w j p omqns papoo euq ay 9 JUNO x pul ye SW 08 ayno suoo om Aq p yyu p s we PUCDES O y yo Buluu Beq yL Buiuuibeq sip 9z Jo s s suo9 paom apod 1ea zo w GO ewoap papos Ayeulg y L ayigads corms axe epnyydwe _ aoeds 7 Ea ZHOOL AONSND3YS YIlYYyI TVWNDIS GALVINGOW JGNLNdWv SNOILONNA TOHLNOD ss YVSA SO AWILL A98 SGNOOAS AYVNIG LHDIVHLS AV dO AWIL SAVA SYNOH SALANIW SGNOD3SS a oc6 sp I 06 s l a 00z op 9 l Vee II oves l Poel au gt Rakes RRR SSRs aswa F A SECS aena Dar MABA eS eae ES Yd Od 6d 8d ld 9d Sd U td Ed Zd td Ud Od Seek ove a jp e e z i soynuepi vonisod 1 Aveuia g Aoura 10w13 lt SI 1NIOd SIHL LY WIL SNLYLS ONAS ANIL 80 0 988 g0 0 988 20 0 998 1 0 SANOS NI AWIL aWLL NO 0 o6 os oz 09 os or oe oz S 0 0 06 08 OL 09 Ov oe oz oL 0 os LNNOD XSQNI GNOO3S 0L SWVHS ANIL AWIL 3 SII Spectracom Corporation 3 39 ion Code Descripti IRIG E Time Figure 3 40 NetClock Instruction Manual 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation BIT CF ELEMENT FUNCTION 50 1 SPACE 51 2 SPACE 52 3 SPACE 53 4 SPACE 54 5 SPACE 55 6 TIME SYNC STATUS 56 7 SPACE 57 8 SPACE 58 9 SPACE 59 PID P6 POSITION IDENTIFIER 60 10 YEAR UNITS Y1 61 11 YEAR UNITS Y2 62 12 YEAR UNITS Y4 63 13 YEAR UNITS Y8 64 14 SPACE 65 15 YEAR TENS Y10 66 16 YEAR T
22. 01 etc A Space separator DDD Day of Year 001 366 HH Hours 00 23 UTC time Colon separator MM Minutes 00 59 Ss Seconds 00 60 Decimal Separator sss Milliseconds 000 999 L Leap Second Indicator space L D Daylight Saving Time Indicator S 1 D O The leading edge of the first character CR marks the on time point of the data stream The time synchronization status character is defined as described below Space Whenever the front panel time synchronization lamp is green When the receiver is unable to track any satellites and the time synchronization lamp is red When the receiver time is derived from the battery backed clock or set manually through the Setup Port Interface 5 8 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series The leap second indicator L is defined as Space When a leap second correction is not scheduled for the end of the month L When a leap second correction is scheduled for the end of the month The Daylight Saving Time indicator D is defined as During periods of Standard time for the selected DST schedule During the 24 hour period preceding the change into DST During periods of Daylight Saving Time for the selected DST schedule During the 24 hour period preceding the change out of DST Example 01 271 12 45 36 123 S The example data stream provides the following information Sync Status The clock has lost GPS time sync Da
23. 10 10 2 103 cgi bin main cgi S lal be coosie S D SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations IPv6 Configuration B M Enable DHCP6 IP Address Prefix Length Delete fe80 230 64fffe04 4aa3 64 F Add a static IPv6 Address and Prefix Length TP Address Prefix Length Default Gateway Services l Enable Daytime Protocol I Enable Time Protocol M Enable Telnet M Enable FTP M Enable SSH M Enable HTTP M Enable HTTPS Submit Reset INTP interface System Relay Security status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us https 10 10 2 103 cgi bin shownetconf cgi 10 10 2 103 amp Figure 3 4 Security Network Screen 2 of 2 3 4 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 3 2 Initial Network Configuration NOTE The IP address assignment in this configuration may be performed even if your network has a DHCP server There may be times when you do not wish DHCP to assign the IP address for the NetClock To configure a NetClock without DHCP or to configure a NetClock that has not been assigned an IP address use the provided serial cable to connect a PC or laptop computer to the serial setup port on the back of the NetClock After making this connection use a terminal program such as HyperTerminal to log into the NetClock as an administrator Use the Command Line Interfa
24. 2 is OFF Relay 3 is OFF Relay not configured as Event Timer Event Relay Action Next Event Frequency IvTPfinterface System RelayfSecurity status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us a rte Figure 3 66 Relay Current Event Scheduler Screen 3 74 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series From the Reset ALL Event Timers screen Figure 3 67 the user may clear any set event timers F Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 10 10 2 102 cgi bin main cgi O SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations Event Timer 1 to 128 will ALL be reset to the following settings EVENT TIMER DEFAULT STATUS Timer Status Deleted Relay Trigger Off Frequency Daily 0 hour 0 minute 0 second 0 millisecond Reset ALL Event Timers M A SE N N EET Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us Done internet As Figure 3 67 Relay Reset ALL Event Timers Screen NetClock Instruction Manual 3 75 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation The Set Event Clock screen Figure 3 68 allows the user to select the local system clock that drives the event function The user may also access the create edit local system clocks feature from this screen F Main Menu Microsoft Intern
25. 5 4 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series Quality Time TCXO Error Standard OCXO Error Option Rubidium Error hours configuration 05 Option 04 milliseconds milliseconds microseconds Space Lock lt 1 lt 0 01 lt 0 3 A lt 10 lt 10 lt 0 72 lt 1 8 B lt 100 lt 100 lt 7 2 lt 18 C lt 500 lt 500 lt 36 lt 90 D gt 500 gt 500 gt 36 gt 90 Table 5 1 Table of Quality Indicators The leap second indicator L is defined as Space When a leap second correction is not scheduled for the end of the month L When a leap second correction is scheduled for the end of the month The Daylight Saving Time indicator D is defined as S During periods of Standard time for the selected DST schedule During the 24 hour period preceding the change into DST D During periods of Daylight Saving Time for the selected DST schedule O During the 24 hour period preceding the change out of DST Example A01 271 12 45 36 123 S The example data stream provides the following information Sync Status The clock has lost GPS time sync The inaccuracy code of A indicates the expected time error is lt 10 milliseconds Date Day 271 of year 2001 Time 12 45 36 UTC time Standard time is in effect NetClock Instruction Manual 5 5 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 5 4 Format 3 Format 3 provides a format identifier time synchronization status character ye
26. COMMAND display Displays current option settings enable Enables options after verifying the hash value 6 5 Itc The Itc command is used to create up to five Local clocks Local clocks allow many of the output ports to be able to provide time data as local time instead of just UTC time This command requires admin level login help ltc The ltc group of commands are used to manage the local time clocks USAGE ltc COMMAND INDEX NAME COMMAND disp create delete tz dst disp Displays information about the local clock Create Creates a new local clock Multiple consecutive spaces in the name will be reduced to a single space delete Deletes a local clock at the specified index tz Assigns a new time zone offset for the local clock 6 2 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series dst Assigns a new daylight saving rule to the clock 6 6 net The command net is used to configure the network interface The net command consists of a set of subcommands that are used to get set or change each individual network setting Some of the network settings require admin level security in order to set or change them help net The net group of commands are used to manage network interface USAGE net COMMAND Arguments COMMAND Config Configure IP settings show Displays network configurations Daytime Enable disable Daytime time Enable disable UNIX time telnet Enable disable
27. Capture Print echo Figure 3 14 Successful Completion of Network Configuration NOTE All IPv4 addresses must be entered in dotted quad format All IPv6 addresses must be entered in standard IPv6 address format NOTE Setting the gateway to Disabled will cause the values in the Gateway Address field to be ignored NOTE Changing the IP address of the NetClock to a different subnet will prompt the NetClock to start using the new IP address immediately If you are connected to the CLI through a network instead of directly through the serial setup port your session will end when the IP address is changed Start a new session and use the new IP address to reconnect to the CLI NetClock Instruction Manual 3 11 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 3 2 3 Default and Recommended Configurations The factory default configuration settings were chosen for ease of initial setup Refer to the recommended settings listed here as applicable for your unit Configuration Default Recommended Where Enabled Web User Interface Enabled Disabled or Command Line Interface Enabled Using customer generated certificate and key or default Spectracom self signed certificate and common public private key SSH SCP SFTP enabled with unit unique 1024 bit keys Disabled or Disabled Enabled with Web User Interface SNMP v3 w encryption Enabled Enabled NTP With no Use MD5 authentication with Web User Interface MD5 Values Entered user de
28. MAJOR MINOR Mar 16 21 38 14 Spectracom spectracom system Time Sync Alarm Mar 16 21 38 14 Spectracom spectracom system Antenna Problem Mar 16 21 38 14 Spectracom spectracom system Frequency Error Mar 16 21 38 44 Spectracom spectracom system STATUS CHANGE Mar 16 21 38 44 Spectracom spectracom system ACTIVE ALARMS MAJOR MINOR Mar 16 21 38 44 Spectracom spectracom system Antenna Problem Mar 16 21 38 44 Spectracom spectracom system Frequency Error Mar 16 21 41 32 Spectracom spectracom system STATUS CHANGE Mar 16 21 41 32 Spectracom spectracom system ACTIVE ALARMS MINOR Mar 16 21 41 32 Spectracom spectracom system Antenna Problem Dd EAE System Relay SecurityStatus amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us arte Figure 3 94 Alarm Log Screen The Alarm Log Figure 3 94 is a running list of the alarms with descriptive information experienced by the NetClock NetClock Instruction Manual 3 113 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 4 Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer Eile Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 10 10 2 102 cgi bin main cgi You have logged in as admin Authorization Log Mar 16 22 56 11 Spectracom httpd pam_unix 1655 authentication failure logname uid 1001 euid 1001 tty ruser rhost user factory INTPIinterface system Relay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights
29. Spectracom products shall not be returned unless a return authorization number is issued by Spectracom Spectracom products must be returned with the description of the claimed defect and identification of the individual to be contacted if additional information is needed Spectracom products must be returned properly packed with transportation charges prepaid Shipping expense Expenses incurred for shipping Spectracom products to and from Spectracom including international customs fees shall be paid for by the customer with the following exception For customers located within the United States any product repaired by Spectracom under a warranty repair will be shipped back to the customer at Spectracom s expense unless special taster delivery is requested by customer Spectracom highly recommends that prior to returning equipment for service work our technical support department be contacted to provide trouble shooting assistance while the equipment is still installed If equipment is returned without first contacting the support department and no problems are found during the repair work an evaluation fee may be charged EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY STATED ABOVE SPECTRACOM DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO SPECTRACOM PRODUCTS OR OTHER MATERIALS PROVIDED BY SPECTRACOM INCLUDING WITHOUT LUMITATION ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Spect
30. flog spectracom alarms log tracking Vv fiocal z err z flog spectracomitracking log operational Vv flocal z wam flog spectracom operational log oscillator M local z notice z ilog spectracom oscillator log journal Vv flocal z debug z flog spectracom journal log update M locai6 z emerg z flog spectracom update log po Da auth Vv loca z alert flogfauth log ntp Vv flocal z crit x flog ntp log E INTP interface SystemJRelay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us Done i tnternet 7 Figure 3 60 System Log Configuration Screen 1 of 2 NetClock Instruction Manual 3 67 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Main Menu Mozilla Firefox O x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help a E gt amp Go htps 10 10 50 20 cgi bin main cgi L Customize Links Free Hotmail _ Windows Marketplace Windows Media Windows Gz Google S SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations auth M Jlocal alert flogfauth log aj ntp Mv local crit z ilog ntp log Remote Syslog Servers IPvy4iHostname Submit Reset M interface SE EEN EN EET Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us https 10 10 50 20 cgi bin showlogconf cgi 10 10 50 20 amp Figure 3 61 System Log Configurati
31. or a licence more free than that OpenSSH contains no GPL code 1 Copyright c 1995 Tatu Ylonen lt ylo cs hut fi gt Espoo Finland All rights reserved As far as I am concerned the code I have written for this software can be used freely for any purpose Any derived versions of this software must be clearly marked as such and if the derived work is incompatible with the protocol description in the RFC file it must be called by a name other than ssh or Secure Shell Tatu continues However I am not implying to give any licenses to any patents or copyrights held by third parties and the software includes parts that are not under my direct control As far as I know all included source code is used in accordance with the relevant license agreements and can be used freely for any purpose the GNU license being the most restrictive see below for details However none of that term is relevant at this point in time All of these restrictively licenced software components which he talks about have been removed from OpenSSH i e RSA is no longer included found in the OpenSSL library IDEA is no longer included its use is deprecated DES is now external in the OpenSSL library GMP is no longer used and instead we call BN code from OpenSSL Zlib is now external in a library The make ssh known hosts script is no longer included TSS has been removed MD5 is now
32. s NetClock Instruction Manual 3 29 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation choice is entered the NetClock will broadcast through the port only when that character is received by the unit e OSO erne plore lol x Eile Edit View Favorites Tools Help A Address la hts 10 10 2 102 cqi bin main cgi Go K X D NTs a a Oe I a OO You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations BAUD RATE 3600 gt DATA FORMAT 00 z REQUEST CHAR Multicast User defined T _ SYSTEM CLOCK UTC x Click here to edit or create local system clocks Submit Reset Interface System Relay Security Status amp Logi Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us C trternet Figure 3 35 Interface Serial Port 1 Screen The baud rate is the speed at which the port will output values This speed must be selected from the dropdown box The default is 9600 baud The Data Fomat is the format in which the date and time stamps are sent from the NetClock Several Data Formats are supported The default is Format 0 NOTE When connecting the remote output to a 9388 unit the DATA FORMAT must be set to match the NetClock s remote output data format If these values do not match the 9388 cannot synchronize By factory default NetClock non 9388 time server units output Data Format 00 while the 9388 is factory configured to receive Data Format 02 Spectracom rec
33. s front panel Ethernet port to an available hub switch on the network with a standard network cable 3 Connect the DC power input jack to a standard AC outlet with the supplied power supply Verify the green Good Link lamp next to the Ethernet connector illuminates 2 2 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation Model 9300 Series 4 5 6 From the network administrator obtain an available static network IP address the network subnet mask and the IP address of the immediate gateway if installed if the subnet must access the NetClock This step is only necessary if you are not using DHCP Assign the IP address net mask and gateway settings by using the rear panel Serial Setup Interface DB9F connector interfaced to a PC with the provided serial cable PC should be running either Microsoft HyperTerminal or ProComm Refer to Options for more information This step is only necessary if you are not using DHCP Install the GPS antenna surge suppressor antenna cabling and GPS preamplifier if required If using a window mount antenna Model 8228 place the antenna in a window that has no metallic tinting or screening in or on the glass and then place the unit in single satellite mode NOTE The 9300 Series NetClock must be in position hold if the unit is to use a window mount 7 8 9 10 11 12 GPS antenna Position hold can be obtained by manually entering the GPS location or by receiving qualified
34. utilities 3 32 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series Format Encoding Bit rate Modulation Time Carrier Coded Frame Expressions Interval BCDroy CF SBS BCDroy CF SBS BCDroy CF BCDroy CF NOTE NOTE BCDroy CF The Spectracom IRIG formats use the control functions for BCD year information and a Time Sync Status bit and in format E the control functions are used for straight binary seconds SBS Refer to individual IRIG Time Code description figures and text IRIG Standard 200 98 format B had 27 control bits and format E had 45 bits for control functions These control bits could be used for any use and there was no defined function Spectracom used the control function element at index count 55 as the TIME SYNC STATUS and the sub frame after position identifiers P6 and P7 as the year info and for format E the sub frame after P8 and P9 for the straight binary seconds SBS The position of the BCD year information does not conform to the newer IRIG Standard 200 04 IRIG Standard 200 04 incorporated the year information after P5 and reduced the allocated control bits to 18 for format B and 36 for format E DCLS is DC Level Shifted output pulse width modulated with a position identifier having a positive pulse width equal to 0 8 of the reciprocal of the bit rate a binary one 1 having a positive pulse width equal to 0 5 of the reciprocal of the bit rate and a b
35. 4 4BSD port ppsclock Magnavox GPS clock driver 26 29 George Lindholm lt lindholmeucs ubc ca gt SunOS 5 1 port 27 30 Louis A Mamakos lt louie ni umd edu gt MD5 based authentication 28 31 Lars H Mathiesen lt thorinn diku dk gt adaptation of foundation code for Version 3 as specified in RFC 1305 29 32 David L Mills lt mills udel edu gt Version 4 foundation clock discipline authentication precision kernel clock drivers Spectracom Austron Arbiter Heath ATOM ACTS KSI Odetics audio clock drivers CHU WWV H IRIG 30 33 Wolfgang Moeller lt moeller gwdgvl dnet gwdg de gt VMS port 31 34 Jeffrey Mogul lt mogul pa dec com gt ntptrace utility 32 35 Tom Moore lt tmoore fievel daytonoh ncr com gt i386 svr4 port 33 36 Kamal A Mostafa lt kamal whence com gt SCO OpenServer port 34 37 Derek Mulcahy lt derek toybox demon co uk gt and 38 Damon Hart Davis lt d hd org gt ARCRON MSF clock driver 35 39 Rainer Pruy lt Rainer Pruy informatik uni erlangen de gt monitoring trap scripts statistics file handling 36 40 Dirce Richards lt dirce zk3 dec com gt Digital UNIX V4 0 port 37 41 Wilfredo S nchez lt wsanchez apple com gt added support for Net Info 38 42 Nick Sayer lt mrapple quack kfu com gt SunOS streams modules 39 43 dack Sasportas lt jack innovativeinternet com gt Saved a Lot of space on the stuff in the html pic subdirectory 40 44 Ray Schnitzler lt schnitz unipress com gt
36. BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This open software is available for at least three years to give any third party for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchang NetClock Instruction Manual REVISION HISTORY First generation manual for the 9300 series products preceded by a demo manual current to software rev Subsequent revision to follow Changes incorporated from Rev 1 to Rev A include addition of IPSec material FTP Statistics material and format recon figuration as well as various software changes and other minor corrections Log clear command has been removed Revision to bring manual current to 3 4 0 NetClock software Changes include adding HALT information in System Configuration revising NTP section and adding product configuration options table Updated SAASM section Changed antenna cable delay range to 50 000 000 nanoseconds Clarified regions for Australia 1 and Austral
37. Certificate File Name Private Key File Name Phase 2 Life Time 0 Minutes z Encryption Algorithm C DES F 3DES F AES F NULL Authentication Algorithm Tl HMAC SHA1 T HMAC MD5 Compression Algorithm M Deflate Submit Reset Interface System Relay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us https 10 10 2 103 cgi bin showipsecikesa cgi 10 10 2 103 amp Y Figure 3 88 IPSEC IKE SA Configuration Screen 2 of 2 3 4 22 6 1 IKE Phase 1 Configuration Exchange Mode defines the mode for Phase 1 when the IKE daemon is the initiator You may select all three options meaning the NetClock supports Main Aggressive and Base exchange modes or you may select one or two modes to support The IKE daemon uses the Main exchange mode when it is the initiator Life Time defines the lifetime of the Phase 1 SA proposal NetClock Instruction Manual 3 103 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation DH group defines the group used for Diffie Hellman exponentiations This directive must be defined using one of the following Group 1 Modp768 Group 2 Modp1024 Group 5 Modp1536 Grouip 14 Modp2048 NOTE When using Aggressive mode the DH group defined for each proposal must be the same Encryption Algorithm specifies the algorithm used for Phase 1 negotiation Choose DES 3DES or AES as desired or as specified by your network administrator Hash Alg
38. Corporation 9300 Series Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 10 10 2 102 cgi bin main cgi D SPECT RACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations Dynamic System Information Uptime 0 years 38 days 21 hours 12 minutes 37 seconds Current internal temperature 44 75 C 112 55 F Major Alarm is OFF Minor Alarm is ON Time Sync status In Sync Time Source GPS NTP Service Status In Sync Stratum 1 Static System Information Product Name is Spectracom Corp Model 9283 Application Name is hs92XX Application Rev is 3 1 0b1 Application Date is 03 14 2006 SSH Rev is OpenSSH_4 1p1 SSL Rev is OpenSSL 0 9 7i fips 14 Oct 2005 Unit s Serial Number 127 GPS Receiver Serial Number 82577655 06 09 2005 MAC Address 00 30 64 04 44 8c System Test Results PCB Test PASSED PCB rev 0 PCC Test PASSED PCC rev 3 CSL Test PASSED CSL rev 5 RTC Test PASSED GPS Startup Self Test FAILED Antenna UC InTPfinterface system RelayfSecurty status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us loe TT i internet 4 Figure 3 107 System Status Screen 1 of 2 The Dynamic System Information section contains the elapsed time that the unit has been powered up for the internal temperature of t
39. Format 8 Remote Serial on rear panel 00 23 Hours YES None Data Format 90 Remote Serial on rear panel NOT AVAILABLE NO Data Format 90 always reflects UTC It can t be configured as local time IRIG B IRIG port on rear panel 12 00 YES None IRIG E IRIG port on rear panel 12 00 YES None 24 Table 2 1 Time Zone Offsets available for Data Outputs NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation Model 9300 Series 2 3 Required Tools and Cables 1 Phillips screwdriver to install the unit s rack mount ears 2 Screwdriver to mount the unit in a standard 19 inch rack 3 Wire strippers for the RS 485 cabling 4 Supplied jeweler s type screwdriver for tightening the RS 485 wiring terminal block connectors Located in the ancillary kit 5 RS 232 straight thru DB9 to DBY cable supplied 6 Ethernet cables Refer to Section 2 7 2 4 Power and Ground Connection WARNING CAUTION This equipment has a connection between the earthed conductor of the DC supply circuit and the earthing conductor This equipment shall be connected directly to the DC supply system earthing electrode conductor or to a bonding jumper from an earthing terminal bar or bus to which the DC supply system earthing electrode conductor is connected This equipment shall be located in the same immediate area such as adjacent cabinets as any other equipment that has a connection between the earthed conductor of the same D
40. GEN SE SEIN Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us nternet Figure 7 13 IRIG Input Screen 7 22 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 7 5 Option 07 SAASM The 9300 series NetClock is available with a secure GPS receiver the Selective Availability Anti Spoofing Module SAASM option for use in military GPS applications Units equipped with the SAASM receiver will display data similar to but formatted differently than the data provided by non SAASM NetClock units The NetClock s SAASM receiver can operate in multiple modes Spectracom supports Standard Continuous and Stationary Averaging modes In Stationary mode the GPS receiver cannot be moving Spectracom software defaults to the Continuous mode in which the receiver may or may not be moving In Stationary Averaging mode the receiver averages the position data received in order to establish a more accurate position fix over time Using this mode provides higher jamming immunity compared to Time Only mode GPS Data provided by the NetClock SAASM receiver includes Number of GPS satellites tracked The GPS status of the unit position hold or otherwise Antenna sense Latitude and longitude of the unit Antenna height Pass or fail for signal quality A grid of data an illustrative portion of which is found in Figure 7 14 provided by the SAASM receiver also includes the GPS Channel satellite veh
41. JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC YY Year without century 99 00 01 etc HH Hours 00 23 Colon separator MM Minutes 00 59 SS Seconds 00 60 The leading edge of the first character CR marks the on time point of the data stream The time synchronization status character is defined as described below Space Whenever the front panel time synchronization lamp is green When the receiver is unable to track any satellites and the time synchronization lamp is red When the receiver time is derived from the battery backed clock or set manually through the Setup Port Interface Example FRI 20APR01 12 45 36 The example data stream provides the following information Sync Status The clock is not time synchronized to GPS Time is derived from the battery backed clock or set manually Date Friday April 20 2001 Time 12 45 36 5 2 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series NOTE Data Format 1 has an available modification that may be made to the data stream structure Most external systems utilizing Data Format 1 will look for a single digit day of the month for day 1 through day 9 with a space in front of each digit 1 42 3 10 11 whereas other systems need to see a two digit day of the month for all days 1 through 9 with a leading 0 instead of a space 01 02 03 10 11 If your device requires the two digit day of the month for days 1 throug
42. Keys are used for server authentication and identification The secure Spectracom product permits users to create or delete RSA or DSA keys for the SSH2 protocol NOTE Due to vulnerabilities in SSH1 protocol it is not supported Only SSH2 is supported Main Menu Mozilla Firefox lol x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help S gt S GF btps 10 10 2 103 cg bin main cgi gt Glz Google g E KI SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations a SSH Configuration Host Keys Delete Keys I Delete Host RSA Key File IF Delete Host DSA Key File I Create Host Key Files Private Key Bit Lengths RSA Key Length i024 DSA Key Length fio24 SSH Authentication Allow either Public Key with Passphrase or Password Authentication Allow only Password Authentication Allow only Public Key with Passphrase Authentication A Mool E InterfaceiSystemJRelay SecurityiStatus amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Done 10 10 2 103 amp 5 Figure 3 73 Security SSH Screen 1 of 2 NetClock Instruction Manual 3 8 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation The user may choose to delete individual Host Keys To delete a key simply select a radio button for the key you wish to delete and press submit at the bottom of the page If the user chooses to delete the RSA or DSA key the SSH will funct
43. Links _ Free Hotmail Windows Marketplace Windows Media Windows D SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations ACTS Server Log Dec 30 03 16 40 Spectracom actsd Message 01 OTM sent 0 955101 ady 0 045000 Dec 30 03 16 41 Spectracom actsd Message 02 OTM sent 0 955089 ady 0 045000 Dec 30 03 16 42 Spectracom actsd Message 03 OTM sent 0 953663 adv 0 046411 Dec 30 03 16 43 Spectracom actsd Message 04 OTM sent 0 949938 adv 0 050137 Dec 30 03 16 44 Spectracom actsd Message 05 OTM sent 0 948384 adv 0 051700 Dec 30 03 16 45 Spectracom actsd Message 06 OTM sent 0 952750 adv 0 047330 Dec 30 03 16 46 Spectracom actsd Message 07 OTM sent 0 950428 adv 0 049655 Dec 30 03 16 47 Spectracom actsd Message 08 OTM sent 0 948244 adv 0 051859 Dec 30 03 16 48 Spectracom actsd Message 09 OTM sent 0 947876 adv 0 052195 Dec 30 03 16 49 Spectracom actsd Message 10 OTM sent 0 950206 adv 0 049868 Dec 30 03 16 50 Spectracom actsd Message 11 OTM sent 0 950278 adv 0 049807 Dec 30 03 16 51 Spectracom actsd Message 12 OTM sent 0 951224 ady 0 048861 Dec 30 03 16 52 Spectracom actsd Message 13 OTM sent 0 949095 adv 0 050990 NTP interface System Relay Security Status amp Log z Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Doe a 40 10 50 20 amp Figure 7 7 ACTS Server Log 7
44. PKCS 7 PEM and DER formatted certificates The user can create a customer specific x509 self signed certificate an RSA private key and x509 certificate request using the web browser user interface RSA private keys are supported because they are the most widely accepted At this time DSA keys are not supported 3 4 17 5 Requesting Certificate Authority Certificates Once the processing to create the certificate request RSA private key and self signed certificate is completed the Web UI will display the certificate request The user can submit this certificate request to the company s Certificate Authority for a verifiable authenticable third party certificate Until this certificate is received the user s self signed certificate displaying the information shown herein can be used 3 86 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series The NetClock will load this new self signed certificate and private key after the user selects a few more web page options or when the user selects the Exit connection to product button at the top of the screen You will see a pop up window in Windows operating systems The certificate can be installed or viewed using this pop up window Other operating systems may vary in how they install and accept certificates External Internet access may be required by your Certificate Authority to verify your third party certificate Main Menu Mozilla Firefox lol x File Edit View Hist
45. Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series z osoft Inte ore 10 x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ar D SPECT RACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations The system supports two modes based on the antenna type If you use window mount antenna and could not get 4 or more satellites please select the single satellite mode The system will then automatically switches to the different qualification algorithm Standard mode Single satellite mode Submit Reset MA SEN E eN SET Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us i internet Figure 3 54 System Mode Screen 3 4 10 Activating System Options and Rolling Back Updates From the System Update screen Figure 3 55 the user may activate system options and rollback software updates effectively returning the NetClock to its previous software version and configuration settings To activate system modem or security options click the Activate Option box choose the option you wish to activate and enter the activation key provided by Spectracom before clicking Submit To return the NetClock to its previous setup configuration Configuration or software version Firmware click the appropriate selections and click Submit NOTE The NetClock must be rebooted Figure 3 56 for the active option and configuration firmware rollback s to take effect
46. System SNMP vinci och tab tiniestretadecnutauea tid naea a a i aTi 3 45 Configuring Alarms asan eg cast aM cent ail a a a a TU a seats 3 48 Configuring GPS 21ii s attend dnanauneewel dun ded amie adnan inde Aa 3 49 Configuring System Time and Local ClOCKS 0 c seessessessessessessesseeseeseesessseaeesteatesteaeeseeateaneatesteaterseansetentes 3 51 Setting the System MOUS ano ated ccs Saas sAte ate tea char ceaiccsacda hae gte ees acca pias aabvacsh cde ine caschsereedlatcemeeeratactasts 3 58 Activating System Options and Rolling Back Updates 0 esses eesti 3 59 REDO CUNO NGS VSUEM 222 t auton ah aiaia natant iad cere AEAEE 3 61 Configuring S Stem HOWOVEl aiiin a a ie ai aE a 3 62 Configuring IPPS LINDE sseages sage redseve onab asa sas vescares Bask uvelaeve unas a AA A AAR a 3 64 S tidli Tim Code SQ sdeisetiuesisiia mie nani aude ad Big bein heed 3 65 Configuring System LOGS ia catch asviorunn a eetnnnelaitia assent usin esta eee eae 3 67 Configuring and Testing RELA VSe cc ca ccach ciasteteetetmamuegetnnaatnlaasautine naaamtmmame atin 3 69 Configuring Network Security sca sec sec etes nts tua secucd ees theseacesechin Lenal coats tttaca ctuceneas cca Geta eeancece caumeciaasee ea teens 3 78 If You Cannot Access a Secure Net lock csictsestisdssuseceetectauteveedevsidsunstaecadeesaenersctnitedeedactuvesigede aedetanitersde 3 90 Configuring USER ACCOUNT a asiain a a a a a y 3 91 Configuring S NMP VI V2 a NA W3 cases varirnar naa lave as R
47. Telnet ftp Enable disable FTP http Enable disable HTTP https Enable disable secure HTTP ssh Enable disable SSH 6 7 sys help sys The sys group of commands are used to retrieve information about the system USAGE sys COMMAND Arguments COMMAND mem Display memory information Use v for verbose mode 6 8 mdo The mdo command is used to configure the dial out modem option if it is installed The mdo command consists of a set of subcommands used to control logs and modem configuration help mdo The mdo group of commands are used to setup the modem USAGE mdo COMMAND Arguments COMMAND mode Sets the Serial Setup Interface into a console or modem mode Baud rate can be specified in modem mode dialnow Dials out immediately baud Sets baud rate specified by user ITU R protocols use 1200 and ACTS protocols use 9600 NIST ACTS may support either however 9600 is recommended speaker Sets modem speaker on off NetClock Instruction Manual 6 3 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 6 9 ser The ser command allows the rear panel Serial ports to be configured from the console They require admin level login help ser The ser group of commands are used to setup serial ports RS 232 USAGE ser COMMAND SERIAL Arguments COMMAND disp Displays the current serial port settings all Configures all settings of a serial port fmt Configures the format of the serial port output req Sets the request character o
48. This information is useful to verify proper antenna placement and receiver performance during installation and later troubleshooting The page describes the number of satellites being tracked and will indicate that the NetClock is acquiring if it is still searching for qualified satellites Bad Geometry means the number or position of satellites being tracked is not sufficient to calculate position A 2D Fix means the receiver is tracking at least three qualified satellites while a 4D Fix means the receiver is tracking at least four satellites Position Hold means the GPS receiver has collected enough information to 3 124 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series determine its location Some other terms you will encounter on the GPS Signal Status screen include Antenna Sense SSSSS SSSSS reports the status of the antenna sense circuit There are three main flags OK Over Current and Under Current The three flags are described here OK Flag The OK flag is displayed if both antenna sense bits are cleared This indicates that the antenna is drawing current within the normal range Over Current Flag This flag is displayed if the over current bit is set This indicates that too much current is being drawn through the circuit and the overload protection circuit is limiting the feed current The receiver will attempt to continue the normal acquisition and tracking process regardless of the a
49. USA post 2006 if your location complies with the USA DST Rule and it is the year 2007 or later Select Australia 1 if your location complies with the Australia 1 DST Rule Australian Capital Territory New South Wales South Australia Tasmania Victoria Select Australia 2 if your location complies with the Australia 2 DST Rule Western Australia Manually Defined by Week and Day This option is provided for advanced users You can input start time end time and the hour to change for the daylight saving By selecting this option the DST rule can be defined based on 3 56 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series the weekday week and month of the local time you defined for this interface Manual definitions are ALWAYS based on local time not UTC Manually Defined by Month and Day This option is provided for advanced users You can input start time end time and the hour to change for the daylight saving By selecting this option the DST rule could be defined based on the day and month of the local time defined for this Interface If you select the February 29th as the start time or end time the unit will respond that the entry is an illegal date Manual definitions are ALWAYS based on local time not UTC Example 1 To create a Local System Clock to UTC 1 with no DST rule Select Create New and assign the clock a meaningful name Click on the Manually Defined UTC Offset button Select UTC 1 00 from
50. Values in the CLI sccessessessessesssessrssessrsssesssresnssnssesnsenseesnsenseesess 3 9 Figure 3 13 Initial Configuration using the Click sciaisctdscessesisanvetsistasiedlsodionsdsltiassasainunts aasioaiiansdnnnelions 3 10 Figure 3 14 Successful Completion of Network Configuration c cssssscssssssesscssscssssssneseesssessussseessuesseesseesesseesees 3 11 Figure 3 15 System Reboot Halt Screen 1 of 3 viscccvscerscalece yessiceeinnrtn diet eiaceclva titi sdentadiettineialahdy Meiners 3 13 Figure 3 16 System Reboot Halt Screen 2 of 3 szsasccccnticceincutwan wianticuninae Midian daeisteawte 3 14 Figure 3 17 System Reboot Halt Screen 3 of 3 23 snswee iit anacadenamneisnbineddindieadnaaniennianacs 3 14 Figure 3 18 Command Line Interface CLI c sesssssessscsesssctesseeeesseeeeseetesneessseeseeaeenseatenseseenseaeenseseeteseenseatansestens 3 15 Figure 3 19 Halting the System from the CU ee ccsds ccertcssveersconcserbseacttedaus Curdanatiocan tusbus tas dadseastantustancautidsdasbteasnacdaeatbart 3 15 Figure 3 20 Rebooting the System from the CLI s csalaciersSoassavausestesdvedsigedusdshebassatiarasttctesstavdved ness lbaniavaieasterieedsitet 3 16 Figure 3 21 Reboot MIB Location Options SNMP wiccs stecvenisateds arsctar hotel Game cia arnitestetemhd mtu arent 3 16 Figure 3 22 Rebooting the Unit through SNMP st ciistanlWtncieerstaNednnests atolveianandneondaetathaloumnaiidleionty 3 17 Figure 3 23 Halting the Unit throughSNM Pisiis eisivud
51. _ Connected 0 01 59 Auto detect S6008 N 1 SCROLL cars NUM Capture Print echo Figure 3 12 Prompt for Initial Configuration Values in the CLI NetClock Instruction Manual 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation During initial configuration you will be prompted to enable or disable and enter as necessary various settings and addresses The include the following Hostname This is the network hostname that identifies the NetClock DNS Server This is the IP address of the DNS server if any DHCP Setting This enables or disables DHCP This must be set for IPv4 and IPv6 The NetClock always generates a static IPv6 address in addition to the dynamic IPv6 address es Gateway When the gateway IP is disabled on the product the unit cannot be accessed from subnets outside the local subnet When enabled the IP address of the subnet s gateway must be specified The default is disabled IP Address This is the unique 32 bit static address assigned to the product The default address is 10 10 200 1 commi HyperTerminal loj x Eile Edit View Call Transfer Help Current Primary DNS Server es 1 1 10 Enter new Primary DNS Serv Keeping Primary DNS Bergen io 1 1 10 Current Secondary DNS Server 10 1 1 14 Enter new Secondary DNS Server Keeping Secondary DNS Server i0 1 1 14 IPv4 CONFIGURATION Current DHCP setting enabled Enable DHCP setting yes no DHCP settings enabled Current Gatewa
52. a a Aa a AN 1 5 Protocols SUP OCMC Oh ssn antanan a a eie a aa 1 5 RS 232 Communication POM aeiaai an aan e aeara E 1 6 PS eA Go O UUtan a E NA V A E AA 1 6 Relay OUTS innsinn a a a 1 6 IRIG OUDUt wes Sivas anan a n a a a a i 1 7 TEPS OUMU Sr a E A A aaa a A A cases a eatvace 1 7 1PPS Input Specifications recs csc czas tice tae cay tots stat ssa cias sie aa bassaavacetasasates Avesa tad maths aan EEE EE EEEE a 1 8 Frequency O UDU i arnan a a oles otaaiay Saaai eiT aaa S EEE 1 8 APUR P OWE en eai naa NANA EANA AA AIR AR aA EARRA ai ENa aS 1 8 Mecha i al and Environmental ssena a a E E a NN 1 8 INSTALLATION 0 0c000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 a Et Inspect Nienna an a a a alaia a a a edatea tsaweicnats 2 1 AVENTO ennan a ATOS RNE A ETEEN 2 1 SUMMAT Er n cote ae Se E A A K OET E O tt wha A AA 2 2 Required Toglsand Cables pancncennoninomonnaaa a aaa 2 5 POWER and GUNG CONMECHON sivecsasist ace snccinedsnos ia cneaseaeadecs eatnieienat ecianisdtoaias lun naa a aaa 2 5 Rack WOU ANG asi ates seat ccdiotta a a ei aaa aa ad Metis 2 6 GPS Antenna Ins tallatonin anita aatncsann dnsaieic davis wand anioranda Aas hand kinsminnaminenin 2 6 Antenna Cable for Outdoor AMtenna isdccasscsslaceateaestesceats cactzsncetosteeBanitedueats taceattaraven adr aviie tedeeatictevecsivclap haa 2 6 Cable EengtNS essasi antaa anaa EA NN adia 2 6 Model 8224 GPS SPItET ninien aa ae a a i a a ahi 2 8 Model 8226 Impulse SUppreSSOr ssssssssssss
53. as they become available http www spectracomcorp com Please contact Customer Service before returning any equipment Spectracom Customer Service must provide you with a Return Material Authorization Number RMA prior to shipment When contacting Customer Service please be prepared to provide your equipment serial number s and a description of the failure symptoms or issues you would like resolved Freight to Spectracom is to be prepaid by the customer Once you have obtained the RMA number ship your equipment to the following address Spectracom Corporation Repair Department RMA xxxxx 95 Methodist Hill Drive Rochester NY 14623 1 4 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 1 5 Specifications NOTE The specifications listed herein are based on standard operation with the unit synchronized to GPS and with the GPS receiver in position hold or the equivalent for non GPS units 1 5 1 Receiver Received standard L1 C A Code transmitted at 1575 42 MHz Satellites tracked Up to twelve simultaneously Acquisition time Typically lt 4 minutes from a cold start Antenna requirements Active antenna module 5V powered by the NetClock 16 dB gain minimum Antenna connector Type N female 1 5 2 RS 232 Serial Setup Interface Port Function Accepts commands to locally configure the IP network parameters for initial connectivity Also used as the interface to the dial out modem Option
54. binary 0 2 12 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation Model 9300 Series B Terminal A Terminal Figure 2 7 RS 485 Output Spectracom offers many devices that accept the RS 485 data stream as an input reference These products include display clocks RS 485 to RS 232 converters Ethernet Time Servers and radio link products to meet various time applications and requirements For information on Remote Output usage refer to Section 2 8 2 2 8 3 Remote Output Usage The Remote Outputs provide a continuous once per second time data stream in RS 485 levels RS 485 is a balanced differential transmission which offers exceptional noise immunity long cable runs and multiple loading These characteristics make RS 485 ideal for distributing time data throughout a facility Each Remote Output can drive 32 devices over cable lengths up to 4000 feet Spectracom manufactures wall clocks Ethernet Time Servers RS 485 to RS 232 converters and radio link products that utilize the RS 485 data stream as an input Refer to sections 2 8 4 2 8 5 and 2 8 6 for more information on time data bus interconnections Follow the guidelines contained therein when constructing the RS 485 data bus 2 8 4 RS 485 Guidelines and Cable Selection Low capacitance shielded twisted pair cable is recommended for installations where the RS 485 cable length is expected to exceed 1500 feet Table 2 3 suggests some manufacturers and part num
55. cable and terminal program be attached unless the system administrator is configuring or performing maintenance If your company disables HTTPS loses the system passwords allows the certificate to expire deletes the certificate the certificate and private keys and deletes the Host Keys or forgets the Passphrase access to the secure Spectracom product can become denied To restore access to your system you must utilize the setup port to restore the admin accounts default password The admin account can then be used to enable HTTP using the net HTTP command Contact Spectracom Technical Support for details on how to do this 3 90 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 3 4 19 Configuring User Accounts Main Menu Mozilla Firefox loj x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help ie E SS GB O htps 10 10 2 103 cg bin maincgi S x gt C z cooge IS D SFECIHRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations Create or edit one of the 16 possible User accounts Note admin and user are predefined accounts For these accounts only the passwords may be changed User Account Create New submit delete NTP interface System Reiay Security Status amp Logi Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Done 10 10 2103 amp Ui Figure 3 77 Security User Account Screen From the Security User Ac
56. current latency Number of Calibration calls This is the number of calibration calls to be made before the modem is declared as calibrated The accuracy of the latency calculation depends directly on this number The more calls that are made the more accurate the calculation will be This should not be lowered from the default but it may be safely raised Calibration Call Interval This is the interval between calibration calls This value along with the number of calibration calls will determine how long the calibration process will take 7 1 7 Modem Testing The modem can be tested using the Web UI through the Modem Test screen Figure 7 11 Test Now Tests the modem to make sure it can correctly dial out This may only be done while in time synchronization from another source such as GPS To test in other states use the dial now button The result of this test will be written to the log file Test On Interval Enables the modem test interval If the unit has not made another type of call during this interval then a test call will be made Test Interval Sets the modem test interval In order to set these values the Test On Interval box must be checked If the interval expires before another type of call is made then a modem test call will be made To schedule a call when not in sync from another time source use the Call Interval setting in the Dialout Settings page 7 14 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom
57. for additional information 2 8 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation Model 9300 Series 0625 inch 15 88mm P pronare AF 1 190 inch INSTALL O RING O k TO RECEIVER M SURGE PROTECTED LMI DO NOT REMOVE LID D SINGLE POINT GROUNDING PANEL OR BULKHEAD S 203 inch 5 16mm NE DIAMETER HOLE PATTERN ANONO OOOO OOOO OU000 00000000 00NON SS OOOO NOON OOONOONN00 ONO NNOONONOONNG ON NOIOOOONNONONNOONNNNNNNONOND Figure 2 3 Model 8226 Impulse Suppressor Refer to the Model 8226 Manual for proper installation 2 6 5 Model 8227 GPS Inline Amplifier An inline amplifier is required whenever GPS antenna cable lengths cause greater than 16 dB attenuation The Model 8227 GPS Inline Amplifier shown in Figure 2 3 extends the maximum cable length The Model 8227 provides 20 dB of gain and is powered by the NetClock receiver Figure 2 4 Model 8227 Inline Amplifier Two LMR 400 field installable N type connectors are provided with the Model 8227 to splice in the amplifier wherever it must be placed However the recommended method to avoid having to cut the antenna cable is to determine the desired location of the Model 8227 ahead of time and then order two lengths of pre terminated cables instead of just one long cable that spans the entire distance between the antenna and the NetClock A five foot N type conne
58. formatted as indicated in the OpenSSH web site can be loaded onto a secure Spectracom product The user transfers a new public key file using an insecure FTP client or a secure SCP or SFTP client using only account password authentication The user should place the new public key s file in the ssh directory Secure shell sessions using an SSH client can be performed using the admin or a user defined account The user may use Account Password or Public Key with Passphrase authentication The OpenSSH tool SSH KEYGEN may be used to create RSA and DSA keys used to identify and authenticate user login or file transfers The following command lines for OpenSSH SSH client tool are given as examples of how to create an SSH session Creating an SSH session with Password Authentication for the admin account ssh admin 10 10 200 5 admin 10 10 200 5 s password admin123 The user is now presented with Boot up text and or a gt prompt which allows the use of the Spectracom command line interface Creating an SSH session using Public Key with Passphrase Authentication for the admin account The user must first provide the secure Spectracom product a RSA public key found typically in the OpenSSH id_rsa pub file The user may then attempt to create an SSH session ssh i id_rsa admin 10 10 200 5 Enter passphrase for key id_rsa mysecretpassphrase Please consult the SSH client tool s documentation for specifics on how to use the tool
59. ground by connecting to Pin G of the Alarm Outputs connector GROUND RELAY THREE RELAY TWO RELAY ONE NOTE Relays are shown in the de energized state event off Figure 4 1 Event and Alarm Relay Contacts NetClock Instruction Manual 4 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 4 2 Leap Second occurrence 4 2 1 Reasons for a Leap Second Correction A Leap Second is an intercalary one second adjustment that keeps broadcast standards for time of day close to mean solar time Leap seconds are necessary to keep time standards synchronized with civil calendars the basis of which is astronomical They are used to keep the earth s rotation in sync with the UTC time If it has been determined by the International Earth Rotation and Reference Systems Service IERS that a Leap Second needs to applied this time correction occurs only at the end of a UTC month and has only ever been inserted at the end of June 30 or December 31 A Leap Second may be either added or removed but in the past the leap seconds have always been added because the earth s rotation is slowing down Historically Leap seconds have been inserted about every 18 months However the Earth s rotation rate is unpredictable in the long term so it is not possible to predict the need for them more than six months in advance The NetClock can be alerted of impending leap seconds by either of the following methods 1 GPS Receiver The GPS satellite system
60. have difficulties maintaining at least four satellites continuously the window mount antenna Model 8228 should not be used when disciplining of the 10 MHZ is desired The antenna must be installed outdoors with a good view of the horizon Main Menu Mic rosoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 10 10 2 102 cgi bin main cgi SPECT RACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations BAUD RATE 9600 FORMAT O SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK UTC REMOTE PORT 2 BAUD RATE 9600 FORMAT 0 SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK UTC IRIG FORMAT B LEVEL AM AMP 128 CARRIER 1000 HZ SIGNATURE CONTROL NONE SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK UTC Front Panel Display LCD 1 DISPLAY FORMAT Network FONT ARIAL TIME FORMAT 24 Hour DATE FORMAT MM_DD_YYYY SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK UTC Front Panel Display LCD 2 DISPLAY FORMAT Date Time FONT ARIAL TIME FORMAT 24 Hour DATE FORMAT MM_DD_YYYY SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK UTC Frequency Outputs 10MHz SIGNATURE CONTROL MODE NONE Restore to factory defaults A SASI E E EET Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us Figure 3 43 Interface Set to Defaults Screen From the Interface Set to Defaults screen Figure 3 43 the user may click the Restore to factory defaults button to set the Interface values and the Interface values ONLY to the factory s
61. made on a user specified time table If the call interval is more than a month leap seconds may be missed If a leap second is to be inserted at the end of the month then the clock will be scheduled to do so If the time is off by more than half a second then the unit will be immediately put into unsynchronized mode time synchronization lamp will extinguish and time outputs will be ignored 7 1 7 3 Time Sync Call Time synchronization calls occur to set the second and sub second timers and to check for any leap seconds If a call is successful the timer will be set and the unit will be put in holdover mode with the holdover timer reset In addition if a leap second is to be inserted at the end of the month then the clock will be scheduled to do so Time synchronization calls will be made once the unit has gone into unsynchronized mode until it obtains sync from another time source During this period calls will be made on a user specified timetable or any time the unit goes out of sync 7 1 7 4 Modem Test Call Test calls are calls that make sure the modem is working The modem will call out and check for valid time messages The unit will log test passed if it was able to get good time messages or failed if it was not No changes will be made to the system time Testing can be done only in sync from another time source and can either be on a specified interval or as requested 7 1 8 Verify Modem Operation For the modem to function with
62. menu will be displayed on the left side of the Web UI Click the Network link to access the necessary Network configuration fields Figure 3 3 and Figure 3 4 Main Menu Mozilla Firefox loj x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help i gt S a i LO https 10 10 2 103 eg bin main cai Sle gt Ge coogle Q D SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations Hostname NetCiock92835 DNS Servers Primary DNS Server fonio Secondary DNS Server horian oS lt 2 27 XD lt IPv4 Configuration Enable DHCP IP Address fio fo f fo Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 J M Enable Gateway Gateway Address fio fio ff po IP v6 Configuration M Enable DHCP IP Address Prefix Length Delete fe80 230 64ff fe044aa3 64 I Add a static IPv6 Address and Prefix Length TP Address Prefix Length Default Gateway E NTP interaceSystem Relay SecuritylStatus amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us https 10 10 2 103 cgi bin shownetconf cgi 10 10 2 103 amp Figure 3 3 Security Network Screen 1 of 2 NetClock Instruction Manual 3 3 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Refer to the nitial Network Configuration section to continue your product configuration Main Menu Mozilla Firefox E lol x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help ak gt O htps
63. nAn Rein nam En aaan Eii 7 5 ALS Modeni Dial QUt S EWP airinn anaa aTa aE 7 9 TL6 Modem Dial t ininosirinnvimsoraoinengni en era E E A tieaeny 7 10 T Modem TEStinNg sce ra susan eateries Sach on wl is a ack A A on hae colli RA 7 14 1 1 8 Verify Modem Operation cassasdanidiininaminned adidas aaia aa aididia as 7 16 7 2 Option 04 Rubidium Oscillator ss ssssssssssssssssrsssssrrssssrrsnsrrsnnrrnnnnnnnnntnnnntnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnn neta nrnna ata 7 19 7 2 1 Comparison of the Rubidium oscillator to the OCXO and standard TCXO oscillators sess 7 19 7 3 Option 05 OHO SCI GTO rsin Raa i Na eiia iN 7 20 7 3 1 Comparison of the OCXO to the Rubidium and Standard TCXO oscillators sser 7 20 7 4 Option 06 TR Gia ste totale ves ern aoll lc aaa atlantis A A T E vans te heli 7 21 PAA IRIG INPUES POC CATIONS a cedecciestvessira deca tearvesnare vaslieasvesdsiraadusscateamaun a naa iian aiia main 7 21 T42 RIG INPUTS CUD se cnswh mation hm eal aor aunw Gal ein eha A 7 22 7 5 Opo DS Po M a a a n fet at AN Date ag 7 23 Tode Satellite MU Ge ats ieee cena aa ea cea wesc AA a E a ai hai ead anaia 7 24 Poel Satellite S aUinne aN a a aidaa stated 7 24 LD3 ZEOZE art e ci ot ee MA aa a ic ree ttt ta 7 24 Te VSS CUIMOY SAASM 2 se tit eka ie ceed OI aN a es al a aoa an 7 25 7 6 Option 10 Low Phase Noise Rubidium 10 MHz and Differential IRIG Output 7 26 7 6 1 10 MHz Output FREQ OUT Specifications sa sciisitaswedunmn seGinliathariodiainGan ions 7 26 7 6
64. not yet have that you may wish to purchase Those options requiring additional explanation are detailed herein 7 1 Option 03 Modem 7 1 1 Option 03 Basics Option 03 provides the NetClock with the capability to use a modem to dial out via an analog phone line for time retrieval if GPS reception is either lost or cannot be obtained due to site limitations The modem can be configured in the software as either the primary external time reference or it can also be configured as a Secondary Backup reference in case the primary reference is lost The modem interfaces to the NetClock via the Serial Setup Interface located on the rear of the NetClock This dual function port provides the capability to initially configure the network settings and is also the interface for the modem If not initially purchased with the unit Option 03 can be enabled turned on in the field Please contact our Sales department to purchase this option You will be sent a Hash key that can be entered in the NetClock to enable the security algorithms The purchase of the option includes a Spectracom supplied compatible modem NOTE The modem MUST be Hayes AT compatible and configured for this mode of operation to operate correctly with the unit The Spectracom supplied modem is Hayes AT compatible NOTE lf the NetClock s admin or user passwords are changed the NetClock must be rebooted after this change to ensure proper modem operation NetClock Instruction Manu
65. of the NetClock s modem activity This log will have no activity if the NetClock is not equipped with a modem or if the modem has not yet been used Main Menu Mozilla Firefox D loj x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help gt O htps 10 10 50 30 cgi bin main cgi U Customize Links _ Free Hotmail Windows Marketplace _ Windows Media Windows gt IIG 7 Google ay ib SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations Modem Dialout Log Dec 30 19 57 17 Spectracom spectracom system Modem dial out to 9 321 5861 Dec 30 19 57 56 Spectracom spectracom system Message 01 OTM revd 0 997783 adv 0 0450 Dec 30 19 57 57 Spectracom spectracorm system Message 02 OTM revd 0 002724 adv 0 0450 Dec 30 19 57 58 Spectracom spectracom system Message 03 OTM revd 0 006151 adv 0 0465 Dec 30 19 57 59 Spectracom spectracom system Message 04 OTM revd 0 992736 adv 0 0499 Dec 30 19 58 00 Spectracom spectracom system Message 05 OTM revd 0 996288 adv 0 0519 Dec 30 19 58 01 Spectracom spectracom system Message 06 OTM revd 0 999538 adv 0 0483 Dec 30 19 58 02 Spectracom spectracom system Message 07 OTM revd 0 998202 adv 0 0497 Dec 30 19 58 03 Spectracom spectracom system Message 08 OTM revd 0 999781 adv 0 0481 Dec 30 19 58 04 Spectracom spectracorm syste
66. our Sales department to purchase the modem option Refer to Options for more information 3 130 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 4 Day to Day Operation Operation of the 9300 series NetClock is relatively intuitive and requires little operator intervention during normal network activities 4 1 1 Event and Alarm Relay Outputs The NetClock features three programmable relay outputs The relays can be configured as major alarms minor alarms or events They can control bells whistles sirens or other devices based on the event alarm setup Each event has an assigned start and stop time An event can be scheduled for daily monthly or specific date occurrences An example of a daily event schedule is to sound the siren at the fire station at noon every day for five seconds An example of a dated event is to schedule a test of the emergency evacuation horns on May 9th 2007 from 10 00 AM to 10 05 AM The event timer is configured using the Web UI Relays are configurable as events or alarm outputs Refer to the appropriate configuration screens in Section 3 of this manual Event and alarm relay contacts are rated at 2 0 Amps 30 VDC The relays will be in the de energized state refer to Figure 4 1 when power is removed when a major alarm is present and the relay is configured as a major alarm or when an event is on and the relay is configured as an event output The relay contacts can be referenced to
67. reserved Manual Contact us Myon iter Figure 3 95 Authorization Log Screen The Authorization Log Figure 3 95 is a running list of authenticated users who have accessed the NetClock 3 114 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation A Main M Microsoft Internet Explorer 9300 Series Eile Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 10 10 2 102 cgi bin main cgi SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations Event Log DS AE ST REN SY SEEN Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us eyo internet Figure 3 96 Event Log Screen The Event Log Figure 3 96 is a running list of the event timer relay activity NetClock Instruction Manual 3 57 25 Spectracom spectracom system OPEN EVENT 50 3 58 00 Spectracom spectracom system CLOSE EVENT 50 3 56 00 Spectracom spectracom system OPEN EVENT 41 4 04 00 Spectracom spectracom system CLOSE EVENT 1 4 04 01 Spectracam spectracom syster OPEN EVENT 4 4 04 01 Spectracom spectracom system CLOSE EVENT 2 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer BEG File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Address http 10 10 2 102 cgi bin main cgi v You have logged in as admin GPS Qualification Log Mar 16 22 00 00 Spectracom spectrac
68. rights reserved Use is subject to license terms below This distribution may include materials developed by third parties Sun Sun Microsystems the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the U S and other countries Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BU
69. section Review the changes made and click Submit The browser will display the status of the change The unit will allow you to define different Time Zone and DST rules for different Interfaces and a front panel display Option 02 if so equipped In order to use this feature properly users have to know the correct Time Zone Offset and DST rule for your area The general Time Zone and DST rule information can be found from the following web sites http Awww worldtimeserver com http webexhibits org daylightsaving b html 3 4 9 Setting the System Mode The user may set the system mode from the Set System Mode screen Figure 3 54 The system supports two modes of operation These are single satellite mode and standard mode Use single satellite mode if you are using a window mount antenna and cannot receive at least four satellites This will switch the qualification algorithm used and allow the system to operate with a fewer number of satellites but the accuracy and capabilities of the optional Rubidium Option 04 and OCXO Option 05 oscillators will be decreased because of the poor GPS antenna visibility NOTE Single satellite mode compromises the accuracy of the NetClock and the full capabilities of the optional OCXO and Rubidium oscillators Always use standard mode if you are using a roof mount antenna and can obtain signals from at least four satellites Standard mode is the factory default 3 58 NetClock Instruction Manual
70. select SSH protocols and provide user private keys 3 4 17 2 Secure File Transfer NetClocks provide secure file transfer using the SSH client tools SCP and SFTP Authentication is performed using either Account Passwords or Public Key with Passphrase However unlike SSH in which the admin or a user defined account is used a special user account is provided 3 84 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series named SCP for these tools The SCP user account has the same password as the admin account It differs from the admin account in that it does not run the Spectracom product shell It is a limited account that only allows the user to transfer files to and from the product file system folder and to retrieve files from folders which the SCP account has read permission Some sample OpenSSH SCP and SFTP client commands are shown below 1 Perform an SCP file transfer to the device using Account Password authentication scp authorized_keys scp 10 10 200 5 ssh scp 10 10 200 135 s password admin123 Always use same password as admin publickeys 1 00 Pee RESP R EER ean hap ence neenes tr eee ne Tere 5 00 00 2 Perform an SCP file transfer from the device using Public Key with Passphrase authentication scp i id_rsa scpo 10 10 200 5 ssh Enter passphrase for key id_rsa mysecretpassphrase publickeys 100 E PARR NOS yee nate ey Otre ene yee 5 00 00 3 Perform an SFTP file transfer to the de
71. separation for visual resolution Least significant digit occurs first 4 Control Functions IRIG formats reserve a set of elements known as Control Functions CF for the encoding of various control identification or other special purpose functions IRIG E has 45 Control Functions located between elements 50 and 98 The NetClock uses the Control Function field to encode year data time synchronization status and SBS time data Table B 2 lists the Control Function Field and each element s function Element 55 is the time synchronization status bit Element 55 is a Binary 1 when the front panel time synchronization lamp is green and a Binary 0 when the lamp is red Year information consists of the last two digits of the current year i e 98 99 etc Elements 60 through 63 contain the binary equivalent of year units Elements 65 through 68 contain the binary equivalent of tens of years In keeping with IRIG formats the least significant bit occurs first Elements 80 through 97 are encoded with the Straight Binary Seconds SBS time data The SBS time data is incremented in 10 second steps and recycles every 24 hours 5 Pulse rates A Element rate 10 per second B Position identifier rate 1 per second C Reference marker rate 1 per 10 seconds 6 Element identification The on time reference point for all elements is the pulse leading edge Index marker Binary 0 or uncoded element 20 millisecond duration Code digit
72. spectracomcorp dc com Group member attribute member 3 98 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series A sample configuration for Active Directory would be as follows DN for search base dc test dc spectracomcorp dc com Bind DN cn administrator cn users dc test dc spectracomcorp dc com Bind password test Search filter objectclass User Login attribute sAMAccountName DN for password ou users dc test dc spectracomcorp dc com one Group DN cn engineer cn users dc test dc spectracomcorp dc com Group member attribute member Main Menu Mozilla Firefox let kes File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help E gt S amp S htws 10 10 2 103 cg bin main cgi Sx Clz coogle q D SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations Services allowed to use a RADIUS server for authentication Note Select and test one service at a time to prevent a potential user lockout condition I Console login Telnet FTP O SSHISFTP SCP TM HTTP HTTPS Submit Reset NTP interface System Reiay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Done 10 10 2 103 amp Z Figure 3 85 Security RADIUS General Screen From the Security RADIUS General screen Figure 3 85 the user selects the services that may use RADIUS for authentication NetClock Instruction Manual 3 99 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation
73. system Apr 20 22 16 33 Spectracom spectracom system Apr 20 22 18 13 Spectracom spectracom system Apr 20 22 19 53 Spectracom spectracom system Apr 20 22 21 33 Spectracom spectracom systern FREQ ERROR 0 00E 00 FREQ CNT 1000000000 FREQ ERROR 3 33E 10 FREQ CNT 999999999 FREQ ERROR 0 00E 00 FREQ CNT 1000000000 FREQ ERROR 0 00E 00 FREQ CNT 1000000000 FREQ ERROR 6 67E 10 FREQ CNT 1000000000 FREQ ERROR3 3 33E 10 FREQ CNT 999999999 FREQ ERROR 3 33E 10 FREQ CNT 999999999 FREQ ERROR 0 00E 00 FREQ CNT 1000000000 FREQ ERROR 0 00E 00 FREQ CNT 1000000000 FREQ ERROR 0 00E 00 FREQ CNT 1000000000 FREQ ERROR 0 00E 00 FREQ CNT 1000000000 FREQ ERROR 0 00E 00 FREQ CNT 1000000000 FREQ ERROR 3 33E 10 FREQ CNT 999999999 FREQ ERROR 0 00E 00 FREQ CNT 1000000000 Wee AN AAA AA Cin 2 ote ee eee Peek TERA RTA AAA ARERR eI AMMAR Di A ST GEN SA SNE Manual Contact us Meo rte A The Oscillator Log Figure 3 102 is a running list of the NetClock s oscillator activity Figure 3 102 Oscillator Log Screen NOTE The notation FREQ ERROR is a normal entry in the log It is not a frequency alarm condition and does not indicate a problem with the unit NetClock Instruction Manual 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 10 10 2 102 cgi bin main cgi You have logged in as ad
74. the GPS receiver completes the position calculation a message will be displayed to explain that this feature is not valid until the position is available If you select this feature after the GPS receiver determines its position the computed Time Zone Offset information will be shown Once this option has been selected and submitted the NetClock software will determine the values for the appropriate manual fields These manual definitions will be displayed when the defined clock is edited NOTE Automatic time zone calculations are imprecise because the time zones are determined by local political boundaries that may change Manually Defined by UTC Offset A dropdown box is provided with definitions as appropriate that permits the user to select a specific number of hours added or subtracted from UTC for the desired time zone NOTE All of the Time Zone Offset drop downs in the web browser user interface are configured as UTC plus or minus a set number of hours For Eastern choose UTC 5 for Central choose UTC 6 for Mountain choose UTC 7 and for Pacific choose UTC 8 NetClock Instruction Manual 3 55 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation DST SETUP Daylight Saving Time DST observance varies with locality and application Choose the configuration that reflects your location and needs Under the DST SETUP you will see five choices e No DST rule always standard time Automatically configure to unit s physical locality Manuall
75. the NetClock the client mode must be selected in the System Modem Configuration screen for the NetClock to accept the change from console mode If the unit is already powered up and not synchronized choosing dial out now and hitting submit will cause the unit to connect to NIST If the unit is already synchronized this option is not available The dialout now function is not available for operation if the NetClock is in either holdover or sync mode To operate the modem if it is in currently in sync disconnect the antenna and wait until the variable holdover period expires or power cycle the unit to clear the sync condition Then the dial out now function will be available 7 16 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series Once the NetClock has dialed and synchronized to NIST the unit will be in holdover mode until the variable holdover period expires Devices syncing to the NetClock will still sync indicated by the sync light flashing green After the variable holdover expires the unit will declare loss of sync Sync lamp turns red or when the scheduled Time Verification call occurs the modem automatically dials NIST again If connection is made holdover is restored Sync lamp flashes green again Verify proper operation of the modem by observing the status of the front panel sync lamp flashing green after connection to NIST and verifying the Model dial out logs The Modem Dialout Log Figure 7 12 is a running list
76. the RC4 RSA lhash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement ee ee ee es This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 If you include any Windows speci
77. the Time Zone pull down menu Select the No DST rule radio button Review the changes made and click Submit The browser will display the status of the change Example 2 To configure an RS 485 port to go in DST at 2 00am on the 3rd Friday in April and out of DST at 1 00am on the 1st Sunday in October with a DST change of 1 hour Select Create New and assign the clock a meaningful name Under DST Setup select the Manually defined by week and day radio button Enter select 3rd Friday Apr 2 and 0 in the DST In Date section Enter select 1st Sunday Oct 1 and 0 in the DST Out Date section Enter 1 and 0 in the corresponding fields of the Change Amount section Review the changes made and click Submit The browser will display the status of the change Browse to the Interface Setup Remote Port page and Select the proper System Clock Example 3 To change a Local System Clock to be in DST at 1 01am on October 2nd and out of DST at 2 00am on April 17th with a DST change of 30 minutes Select the desired Clock Name Select the Manually defined by month and day radio button Enter select 2 Oct 1 and 1 in the DST In Date section NetClock Instruction Manual 3 57 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Enter select 17 Apr 2 and 0 in the DST Out Date section Enter 0 and 30 in the corresponding fields of the Change Amount
78. the modem dial out feature Call Interval The call interval is used to manually configure how often the modem should dial out for Time verification calls when the unit is in the holdover mode and time synchronization is normally derived from GPS Secondary Backup mode of operation or time synchronization calls when the modem is selected as the primary mode of operation To prevent a leap second occurrence from being missed and a one second error being inserted into the NetClock we recommend the Time Verification calls be placed less than once per month Setting the Time Verification call period to longer than once per month can result in a one second error from the time a leap second is asserted by NIST until the next time verification time synchronization call is placed 7 10 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series OSO erne ore loj x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help a Address http 10 2 128 14 cgi bin main cgi gt Eco E z SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations The dialout settings determine how to call when not in sync with another time source DIAL OUT SETTINGS Phone Numbers Prefix po Predefined NIST Colorado Specified Number 1 303 494 4774 Try calling 2 times Call Interval Set Interval Every 0 Days fl Hours 0 Minutes Daily Every fo Days AtjO 00 fut z Click here to edit or create local sys
79. this box is not checked it means the NetClock is a Statum 2 or higher reference The grids on the NTP References screen allow the user to define by IP address or hostname the locations of other NTP servers to use as time references instead of the configured NetClock s GPS reference and the locations of other NTP servers to use as peers Peers are NTP servers at the same stratum level that are used as an additional check on the NetClock s timing accuracy This prevents it from moving to stratum levels farther away from Stratum 1 if the primary timing reference is lost The maximum number of Peers allowed is 12 It is recommended to use one or more Peers when you desire to provide mutual backup Each peer is normally configured to operate from one or more time sources including reference clocks or other higher stratum servers If a peer looses all reference clocks or fails the other peers continue to provide time to other clocks on the network NTP servers can be configured as potential time references The maximum number of NTP servers used as time references allowed is 12 For best results more than 4 NTP time servers are recommended As few as 1 NTP time server may be used however depending on your needs and network timing architecture A specific NTP server can be configured as the preferred time reference by selecting the preferred checkbox Only a single time reference can be selected as preferred and only when the Netclock is not in St
80. time code are fixed The IRIG OUT and 1PPS IN ports on the rear of the standard 9383 NetClock are replaced by the Option 11 IRIG B and IRIG E outputs specified herein The standard 9383 NetClock s SERIAL COMM 2 port is replaced by the Option 11 ASCII Time Code Output port NOTE The Option 11 outputs will NOT function until the unit has synchronized to GPS Thereafter the outputs will continue to function even if the NetClock is in Holdover mode 7 7 1 IRIG B Output Specifications e AM Output e B126 Format e Fixed amplitude of 5 Vpp into no load e BNC Connector e UTC Time 7 7 2 IRIG E Output Specifications e AM Output e E126 Format e Fixed amplitude of 5 Vpp into no load e BNC Connector e UTC Time 7 7 3 ASCII Time Code Output Format 09 e RS 232 DB 9 Connector e UTC Time e 9600 baud 1 start bit 7 data bits 1 stop bit and even parity in the format lt SOH gt DDD HH MM SSQ lt CR gt lt LF gt where lt SOH gt Start of header ASCII Character 1 DDD Day of Year 001 366 Colon Separator HH Hours 00 23 MM Minutes 00 59 SS Seconds 00 59 00 60 for leap second Q Time Sync Status space SYNC NOT SYNC lt CR gt Carriage Return ASCII Character 13 lt LF gt Line Feed ASCII Character 10 NOTE The carriage return character lt CR gt start bit begins on the second on time point 7 7 4 DC Input Power The DC Input Power is 12 VDC 2 5 amps 1 NetClock I
81. time is required It is recommended that a key bit length be a power of 2 or multiple of 2 The key bit length chosen is typically 1024 but can range from 512 to 4096 Long key bit lengths of up to 4096 are not recommended because they can take hours to generate The most common key bit length is the value 1024 The user is provided with several signature algorithm choices The signature algorithm or message digest is most commonly MD5 Other secure options include SHA1 and RMD160 Consult your Web Browser documentation and Certificate Authority for key bit lengths and signature algorithms supported NetClock Instruction Manual 3 89 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation If a system is rebooted during this time the certificate will not be created When the operation is completed the user will see a certificate request in the certificate request text box A digital file copy of the certificate request can be found in the root directory with the file name cert csr This file can be retrieved using FTP SCP or SFTP The certificate request can also be cut and paste from the certificate request text box on the web browser user interface 3 4 18 If You Cannot Access a Secure NetClock Spectracom assumes that the customer is responsible for the physical security of the product Spectracom secure products are required to be locked in a secure enclosure cabinet or room Unauthorized persons are not to be given access to the product nor should a serial
82. time of day including seconds The hour of the day is expressed in 24 hour format The SBS time is the number of seconds elapsed since midnight The Control Function field contains year information and a time synchronization status bit 1 Time frame 1 0 seconds 2 Code digit weighting A Binary Coded Decimal time of year Code word 30 binary digits Seconds minutes hours and days Recycles yearly B Straight Binary Seconds time of day Code word 17 binary digits Seconds only recycles daily 3 Code word structure BCD Word seconds digits begin at index count 1 Binary coded elements occur between position identifier elements Pg and P5 7 for seconds 7 for minutes 6 for hours and 10 for days until the code word is complete An index marker occurs between decimal digits in each group to provide separation for visual resolution Least significant digit occurs first CF IRIG formats reserve a set of elements known as Control Functions CF for the encoding of various control identification or other special purpose functions IRIG B has 27 Control Functions located between elements 50 and 78 The NetClock uses the Control Functions to encode year information and time synchronization status Table 3 3 lists the Control Function Field and each element s function Element 55 is the time synchronization status bit Element 55 is a Binary 1 when the front panel time synchronization lamp is green and a Binary 0 when the lamp i
83. to 30 minutes will not affect the current countdown The new 30 minutes value will only be used if another power cycle occurred To skip the initial countdown use the Dialout Now feature on the Modem Configuration screen NetClock Instruction Manual 7 11 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation e OSO erne plore E loj x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help a Address la http 10 2 128 14 cgi bin main cgi J pco p SPECT RACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations Daily Every 0 Days Ato fo UTC x Click here to edit or create local system clocks C Weekly Every fb weeks On C MON fF TUE T WED C THU C FRI C SAT F SUN At o foo Jute Click here to edit or create local system clocks Monthly Day fo of every month s First MON x of every 0 month s At o foo jute z Click here to edit or create local system clocks Yearly Every JAN 0 _ At o oo UTC x Click here to edit or create local system clocks Boot Dialout at boot if not synced after 0 Days fi Hours 0 Minutes Submit Reset NTP interface ST REN SME SEINE Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us Figure 7 9 System Modem Dial Out Screen 2 of 2 If the modem is the primary mode of operation for time synchronization the boot dial out value should be set for a very short duration as the unit will not be able to achieve time sy
84. to Section 3 4 11 To delete GPS position data refer to Section 3 4 7 3 3 1 Issuing the HALT Command through the Web UI From the System Reboot Halt page Figure 3 15 click the Halt Now button Wait 30 seconds after making the HALT request before removing power to the unit The system may also be rebooted from this screen Main Menu Mozilla Firefox x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help gt G LO https 10 10 2 101 cgi bin main cgi S e C z coogle 4 You have logged in as admin Caution If you restore factory defaults ALL user configurations will lost and the IP will be assigned by DHCP Record your user settings before selecting reboot or halt F Restore Factory Defaults Caution If you installed any updates reboots may take longer than expected Reboot Now Warning Do not remove power for at least 30 seconds after requesting halt Halt Now Interface System Relay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Done 10 10 2101 amp 5 Figure 3 15 System Reboot Halt Screen 1 of 3 NetClock Instruction Manual 3 13 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Main Menu Mozilla Firefox xj File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Help Oo D E OD Q O hps0 10 128 38 gbinman cg aze Getting Started Latest Headlines oO SPECTRA C OM You have logged in as admin Re
85. troubleshooting this condition 3 4 22 6 3 Configure IPSec Security Policy Configure the IPSec security policy from the IPSec General screen Figure 3 89 NOTE Always configure IKE BEFORE enabling the IKE option from the IPSec General screen If IKE is not configured the IKE daemon won t start correctly when the Security Association is enabled From the IPSec General screen Figure 3 89 enable or disable the IPSec service and specify the Security Association IKE if already configured or Manually Configure In the Security Policy table input the NetClock s IP address as the Source IP and host A s address as the Destination IP NetClock Instruction Manual 3 105 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Main Menu Mozilla Firefox File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help E gt S i LO htps 10 10 2 103 cg bin main cgi S e Glz coogi Q SP E CIRA CO M You have logged in as admin IPsec Service Enabled Disabled Security Association Using IKE Manually Configure Security Policy Source IP Destination IP Protocol Direction Policy AH Level ESP Level fared Pe psec E i Require J 7 Require fae A psec E Requie E 7 Require fan fe psec e Requie EY 7 Requie 2 fan n psec i Requie GY m Requie
86. used manage frequency interfaces USAGE frq COMMAND INDEX Arguments COMMAND mode Sets the signature control mode status Displays the status of the selected frequency output 6 13 stc help stc The stc group of commands are used to setup serial time code input USAGE stc COMMAND Arguments COMMAND disp Displays the current serial time code input settings all Configures all settings of serial time code input fmt Configures the format of the serial time code input baud Configures the baud rate of serial time code input year Configures the year used by format 0 serial time code input NetClock Instruction Manual 65 9300 Series 66 Spectracom Corporation NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 7 Options Spectracom offers several options for the 9300 Series Option Description 9383 9389 9388 02 Front panel display amp Second Serial STANDARD OPTIONAL NO Port Remote Port 03 Dial Out Modem amp ACTS Server OPTIONAL OPTIONAL NO 04 Rb Rubidium Oscillator OPTIONAL OPTIONAL NO 05 OCXO Oscillator OPTIONAL OPTIONAL NO 06 IRIG Input OPTIONAL OPTIONAL NO 07 SAASM GPS Receiver OPTIONAL OPTIONAL NO 08 SPS GPS Receiver STANDARD STANDARD NO 09 TCXO Oscillator STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD Choose one oscillator only Please contact Spectracom s Sales department for information regarding any options you do
87. will automatically update this field when it has a Position Fix Check the GPS Signal Status page found in the Status and Logs menu If the status is Position Fix the location shown is the right location The location input by the user may only help to speed up the time to the first fix during the initial installation The unit will automatically check the status of the GPS receiver after receiving the location input from the user Based on the status of the GPS receiver the unit will either tell the user that the GPS receiver already has finished the first fix and the input was abandoned or send the location to the GPS receiver Main Menu Mozilla Firefox i lol x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help Q E QI ft https 10 10 2 101 cgi bin main cgi s 4 gt G Google SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations Note Cable Delay can be calculated using the formula O L C V aj D Cable delay in nanoseconds L Cable length in feet C 1 016 a constant derived from speed of light V Normal speed of propagation expressed as a decimal number Antenna Cable Delay fo nanoseconds Delete Position and restart GPS Self Survey IF Clear saved GPS position Note If the approximate position of the NetClock is known on startup the time to the first automatic location fix can be reduced by entering the unit s La
88. x X X tt o https 10 10 2 103 cgi bin main cgi sll gt G Google Q SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations IPsec Security Association Configuration Phase 1 Exchange Mode D Main C Aggressive l Base Life Time fo Minutes DH group Group 1 Modp768 Encryption Algorithm bes E Hash Algorithm HMAC MDS E Authentication Method Using Preshared keylocatedin psktt Using x 509 certificate Certificate FiesPth t CS S S Peer s Cerificate Filename st lt CSCS Certificate and private keys on this machine Generate certificate and private key Signature Algorithm fias T a GN RN SY TEN SME SCT cr Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us https 10 10 2 103 cgi bin showipsecikesa cgi 10 10 2103 amp A Figure 3 87 IPSEC IKE SA Configuration Screen 1 of 2 3 102 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series Main Menu Mozilla Firefox lol x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help E E amp O htwps 10 10 2 103 cg binfmain cai lal gt Gle coogle GJ O PECTRACOM You have logged in as admin ynchronizing Critical Operations VBIUNCALS ANu piyale Keys UN UIS ALHS aj Generate certificate and private key Signature Algorithm Md5 z RSA Private Key Length 1024 C Upload the certificate and private key
89. 0 MHz output and a differential IRIG time code output The standard 9383 NetClock Remote Port 2 is replaced by the Option 10 IRIG Time Code Output The IRIG output as shipped from the factory is format B 002 7 6 1 10 MHz Output FREQ OUT Specifications e Sine wave Output e SSB Phase Noise Specifications in a 1 Hz bandwidth for the 10 MHz Reference Frequency o 1 Hz Offset 90 dBc Hz o 10 Hz Offset 120 dBc Hz o 100 Hz Offset 135 dBc Hz e The 10 MHz output power shall be 10 dBm 1 dB sine wave into 50 Q e lt 1x 10 per month in absence of disciplining or GPS signals when GPS locked e lt 1x 10 for periods up to 100 sec 7 6 2 IRIG B Output Remote Port 2 Specifications e Differential Output e B002 Format e Differential output conforms to RS 485 standard e 3 pin Pluggable Terminal Block Connector pin 1 pin 2 pin 3 e UTC Time 7 6 3 DC Input Power The DC Input Power is 24 VDC 2 5 amps 1 7 6 4 Rear Panel Connectors The IRIG B DIFF OUT is provided on SERIAL COMM 2 the rear of the NetClock It replaces IRA COMIC rT T Mg quam the RS 485 REMOTE PORT 2 on the EN a e AA PORT rear panel of the standard NetClock ENT FED ON FN Be ks a ley right S wy SS 3 RS 485 REMOTE 7 26 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 7 7 Option 11 Modified IRIG Output Option 11 provides two IRIG outputs and a Format 09 ASCII serial time code These outputs and the Format 09
90. 00 Series NOTE The Autokey feature can only be configured when NTP is disabled If NTP is enabled the fields in the Autokey screen cannot be accessed To configure Autokey disable NTP from the NTP General screen The user may also choose to use a Groupkey which adds another level of authentication when using Autokey certificates Click the Generate option under Autokey Groupkey to generate a certificate in the text window Cut and paste this text into the text window on the other unit s and click the Upload option to upload it Once an Autokey Groupkey has been generated the first time the Keep Current Groupkey Below option will be selected by default The Statistics FTP screen Figure 3 32 allows the user to configure the locations to which the unit transmits NTP statistical data Files are sent to the remote serve thirty minutes into every hour Remote file names are appended with the UTC date stamp YYYMMDD Main Menu Mozilla Firefox E E j x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help gt E https 10 10 2 103 cgi bin main cgi alal B C coogle qj D SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations Automatic FTP of NTP Statistics Enabled Disabled UserName Password FIP Sewer OO Remote Pth ss C OW O C Remote File Names NTP Clock Statistics NTP Loop Statistics
91. 03 Connector DB9 female pin assignments conform to EIA TIA 574 standard data communication equipment Character structure ASCII 9600 baud 1 start 8 data 1 stop no parity 1 5 3 10 100 Ethernet Port Function 10 100 BaseT auto sensing LAN connection for NTP SNTP and remote monitoring diagnostics configuration and upgrade 1 5 4 Protocols Supported NTP NTP v4 2 0 Provides MD5 and Autokey Stratum 1 or higher RFC 1305 4330 Loading 4 000 requests per second typical Clients supported The number of users supported depends on the class of network and the subnet mask for the network A gateway greatly increases the number of users HTTP HTTPS Servers For browser based configuration and monitoring using Internet Explorer 5 or Netscape 6 per RFC 1945 and 2068 FTP For remote upload of system logs and RFC 959 Logging Syslog SNMP Supports v1 v2c and v3 Telnet For limited remote configuration per RFC 854 NetClock Instruction Manual 1 5 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Security Features Up to 32 character password Telnet Disable FTP Disable Secure SNMP SNMP Disable HTTPS HTTP Disable SCP SSH SFTP Authentication LDAP v2 and v3 RADIUS MD5 Passwords NTP Autokey Protocol Connector RJ 45 Network IEEE 802 3 1 5 5 RS 232 Communication Port Signal Selected time Data Format in RS 232 levels when interrogated by the connected device This port may also be configured to provide a
92. 06 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us Done interme Z Figure 7 10 System Modem Calibrate Screen The calibrate mode allows the user to define the typical latency for the geographic location as well as the time of day the modem is most likely to be used for time synchronization such as for primary mode of operation Calibrate Status The status of calibration is displayed at the top of the screen If the calibration has been made then the unit will say calibrated If the latency has not been set or has been manually set then the unit will say not calibrated If the unit is currently calibrating then the number of successful calls will be displayed here NetClock Instruction Manual 7 13 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Calibrate Settings Calibrate Now Calibrate now is based on the current settings This will calculate the call latency and adjust all future calls based on this value The call latency is based primarily on the phone system Therefore this should be done when the unit is first set up and does not need to be done again unless it is connected to a different phone system Reset Latency Value This resets the latency value to the factory default This can be done if the unit was accidentally set Latency Value Manually Set Latency This box displays the current latency value If the manually set latency box is checked then this can be edited to set the
93. 1 5 Modem Dial Out Setup The modem dial out feature is used as either a Secondary Backup time reference when all other external time references become unavailable or can also be used as a primary reference if an external reference is not available for use Such as the inability to receive GPS at a particular NetClock Instruction Manual 79 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation location The System Modem Configuration screen Figure 7 2 provides options to configure the operation of the dial out modem feature from the left hand menu All fields will display the current system settings 7 1 6 Modem Dialout The Modem Dialout screen Figure 7 8 is used to annotate the phone number used to obtain the time from and to determine how often the modem will be used to retrieve the current time Phone Numbers Prefix The phone prefix is a number s that need to be dialed to reach an outside line Predefined Stores two predefined number NIST Colorado and NIST Hawaii These are the phone numbers to the National Institute of Standards and Technology modem time service Specified Number This field will take any phone number that the user would like to use to dial out to obtain time Try Calling This field specifies how many times the dial out modem software will try to connect to the selected phone number Setting this field s value to 0 will generate a warning because it will prevent any dial out to be made in any condition effectively disabling
94. 2 IRIG B Output Remote Port 2 Specifications cssessesssesesscssssesscsssesssssssuesseessuesseessessseesseeseeseeesseesees 7 26 For VG MOOUIE OW GI einiaid aee Ei a thas shoe i aaa a a in NiE 7 26 16 4 RearP anel ONC CLOG ussiisa aaan iiaa a coeatat tate ereetecsed tana 7 26 7 1 Option TL Modified IRIG QUP temininnarini aranean nuaa 7 27 TIL IR IGAB OUtput Specifications urrera a a a a wlan daatatniy 7 27 Ti IRIG Output Specifications i scsiteescessssesdasedeervieeaves ceuvivesvesedess Cnsvensavad aaaea aana 7 27 7 7 3 ASCII Time Code Output Format 09 s ssssssssssssssssnnrrnsnsnrnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnannnnnnnanannnnnanannnnnnnna 7 27 TAs DEIMDURONE aa a a AA A A A AREA 7 27 7 71 5 Serial Port 2 Format 09 Configuration ce sesstacs teas cs chaste caacknsd sac sheseeties beathal nieces ehitans aaa asta tndtaneaieateata 7 28 PeeBe RearP ANEINC ONMCCHONG rnini a iiai sha stancaeed 7 28 8 LICENSE NOTICES waicsccosiccciccsccccscccdsccdcccccccscccdccd cccccccecccscccsocss 8 T List of Figures Figure 1 1 Front Panel Display avscrs tates ta cts ieateceais ses vaccdce oaicdiesns achat uaiaitaamadtasngeea eae naama oie 1 2 Figure 1 2 NetClock Rear Panel a4 vieauinndcitans car unneedisnadmemindandaannaniaiunaenins 1 3 Figure 2 1 Cabling without Inline AMINE ss accds ica cricoseat angeeats cu cattaceadid aes Savacddtadsstovssiade atta eaetacasdiedp diestiacsahntatus 2 7 Figure 2 2 Cabling with Inline AUN PIPE cacaakssedtc
95. 3 4 17 Configuring Network Security File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help Q E E A O https 10 10 2 103 cg bin main cgi amp m Cle coogle l4 D SPECT TRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations NTP interface System Relay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Done 10 10 2 103 amp 4 Figure 3 70 Security Menu The Security menu groups the NetClock s security functions Figure 3 70 From this menu the user may access screens to configure network security file transfers user accounts SNMP features LDAP features and RADIUS features Spectracom 9300 series products use OpenSSH and OpenSSL OpenSSH is the Open Source version of the Secure Shell which provides a set of server side tools allowing secure remote telnet like access and secure file transfer using remote copy like RCP and FTP like utilities 3 78 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series OpenSSL is the Open Source version of Secure Sockets Library which is used to provide the encryption libraries Together OpenSSH and OpenSSL provide industrial strength encryption allowing for secure remote administration via command line HTTPS web pages and secure file transfers The user is permitted to enable or disable HTTPS and SSH The secure product can be configured to allow access only via NTP and the secure protocol
96. 4 Oct 2005 httpwww openssl org 2007 03 12 15 03 06 INFO 127 0 0 1 500 used as isakmp port fd 20 2007 03 12 15 03 06 INFO 10 10 128 8 500 used as isakmp port fd 21 2007 03 12 15 03 06 INFO 1 500 used as isakmp port fd 22 2007 03 12 15 03 06 INFO fe80 230 64fffe04 4afd eth0 500 used as isakmp port fd 23 m EN SIE GY SY Se Copyright Z0DS Specracom Comoraton All ighi resened Contact us Figure 3 100 IKE Log Screen The IKE Log Figure 3 100 is useful for troubleshooting the status of the IPSec IKE SA configuration NetClock Instruction Manual 3 119 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer Eile Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Address http 10 10 2 102 cgi bin main cgi J Eco D SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations Operational Log Mar 16 21 38 13 Spectracom spectracorm system Unit Started Mar 16 21 38 13 Spectracom spectracom system Spectracom Corp Model hs92xx Mar 16 21 38 13 Spectracom spectracom system Software Version 3 1 0b1 Date 03 14 2006 Mar 16 21 38 13 Spectracom spectracom system IRIG Version 9 02 Mar 16 21 38 13 Spectracom spectracom system Serial Port 1 Version 2 03 Mar 16 21 38 13 Spectracom spectracom system Serial Port 2 Version 2 03 Mar 16 21 38 13 Spectracom spectracom system Remote Port 1 Version 2 03 Mar 16 21 38 13 Spectracom spectrac
97. 6 Figure 3 60 System Log Configuration Screen 1 Of 2 sesssessesssscteseseteseesteseesseeseenseatensestenseatsnseatenseseeteratenseatens 3 67 Figure 3 61 System Log Configuration Screen 2 Of 2 essesescsesssceesesstesesetesssseeeenseeenseseenseatensestenseceaserseenseatens 3 68 Figure 3 62 Relay MENU ainen erian Sorina geint EENE ig Otten iene crema ian tenes epee tatiana 3 69 Figure 3 63 Relay Output Screen 2 4 cee aiectecuh iaagtiatih aa qrectinaalainictc Riad tanGaattitdcamuains 3 70 Figure 3 64 Event Timer Relay SChEGN scescoscdlinstesdapsiecesslariusneatsusasieaeediadiousditiansdeaetaiay uaa neuaen naa aLEN 3 71 PIQUE 3 09 EditNIEwW Event TIME Sneinen Gs ah tle aa nts A a E ad acl aati dau aructays 3 72 Figure 3 66 Relay Current Event Scheduler Screen sessscsssssceesssseessseeesseeteseeeseseeeeseeseseeteseeesesceatesneateraeenseatans 3 74 Figure 3 67 Relay Reset ALL Event Timers Screen v sscsscsscssssesssssssessesscsssucsscsssussscessnsssenssnssseessessseessussesseesseesees 3 75 Figure 3 68 Set Event Clock Screen ss sccdananeiAnwueiidanedadaa eaten esraniendlianins 3 76 Figure 3 69 Test Relays Screen wacac5 ececastsataov falers esti canctcyacaetaiciteacedens windspssdestsapiteeres tain Meads siiectnt areata 3 77 Fle S22 0S ecurity MENU 2sesarsccacdaedefceemc axe sctlce eet cstecplacedt niaaa aTa aTi 3 78 Figure 3 71 Security Network Screen 1 of 2 ssis 3 79 Figure 3 72 Security Network Screen 2 of 2 sssssssssssssss
98. ARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OR MISUSE OF THIS SOFTWARE Ariel Futoransky lt futo core sdi com gt lt http www core sdi com gt 4 ssh keygen was contributed by David Mazieres under a BSD style license Copyright 1995 1996 by David Mazieres lt dm lcs mit edu gt Modification and redistribution in source and binary forms is permitted provided that due credit is given to the author and the OpenBSD project by leaving this copyright notice intact a a ae 5 The Rijndael implementation by Vincent Rijmen Antoon Bosselaers and Paulo Barreto is in the public domain and distributed with the following license version 3 0 December 2000 Optimised ANSI C code for the Rijndael cipher now AES author Vincent Rijmen lt vincent rijmen esat kuleuven ac be gt author Antoon Bosselaers lt antoon bosselaers esat kuleuven ac be gt author Paulo Barreto lt paulo barreto terra com br gt This code is hereby placed in the public domain THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE BRE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROC
99. B AM 1 kHz BCD CF and SBS IRIG E TTL BCD CF and SBS IRIG E AM 100 Hz BCD CF and SBS IRIG E AM 1 kHz BCD CF and SBS 1 5 9 1PPS Output Signal One _ pulse per second square wave derived from the GPS receiver Signal Level TTL compatible into high impedance loads 1 5 V base to peak into 50 ohms Pulse Width 200 milliseconds Accuracy Positive edge within 50 nanoseconds of UTC when locked to GPS Connector BNC female NetClock Instruction Manual 1 7 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 1 5 10 1PPS Input Specifications Signal Signal Level Connector 1 5 11 Frequency Output Signal Signal Level Harmonics Spurious Oscillator Accuracy Connector Signature Control 1 5 12 Input Power Power source DC input Connector Polarity One pulse per second square wave TTL compatible High trigger is 2 1 V low is 0 9 V High Z gt 10k ohms Active rising edge BNC female 10 MHz sinewave 700 mVrms into 50 ohms 30 dBc minimum 35 dBc minimum TCXO Standard 1x10 typical 24 hour average locked to GPS OCXO Option 05 1x10 typical 24 hour average locked to GPS 2x10 per week typical aging unlocked Rubidium Option 04 1x10 typical 24 hour average locked to GPS 1x10 per month typical aging unlocked BNC female This configurable feature removes the output signal whenever a major alarm condition or loss of time synchronization condition is p
100. Binary 1 50 millisecond duration Position identifier 80 millisecond duration Reference marker 80 millisecond duration 1 per 10 seconds The reference marker appears as two consecutive position identifiers The second position identifier or reference marker is the on time point for the succeeding code word 3 38 NetClock Instruction Manual 9300 Series aiqe Pl uoyoUN josjUOD y UO paynuep S juawaja ojUOD yoeg saweuy aw zo JequiNuU peyioeds Aue Buunp auo Aueuiq e peal 0 powweubosd aq uea sjuawaja UOOUN 014U09 Jo UOEUIqWOD 10 puawaja UOHOUNY Jouoo Auy q pue q siayiuep UONIsod UseMjeqg 1NI90 SUOROUNY jO1JUOD BAY AYO4 Aueek sajoAoe1 apoo Gog y Sty SiNd90 Hip jUBWIUBIs sea ay uognjosa pensja 104 uopesedas apIAold 0 psomans yea u s fip ewoap ay UBaMjeq SINDDO JeyJeW XOpU uy 94 dw09 SI POM poo ay UN SAep 10 0 SINOY 104 9 SeynuIW 104 Z spUddes 10 d pue Y SEyNUAp s uawa ie 10 JUIOd u 1 4 1 AU UO Sdd 0 ey si Bpa Bulpes y sw OS JoUOHeINp e sey auo Aeurq y pue sw Oz JO uogeInp e aAeY siayseW X pu pue 019Z reuiq BY Papod PIM s nd ere awe owy y Buunp pajuasesd SUONOUNY 01 7UO9 BU PUL pIOM BPOd BW IYL juaweaja Bupaavons y jo fp Huipeaj y 0 194 1 pue uy uo sdd 4 e10Jeq puov s p O 1o20 uopesnp sw 08 Sq 4 sleyuap uonisod sdd epoo wy Hurp vons y 104 zujod 9u 194 1 PUN uo au S
101. C supply circuit and the earthing conductor and also the point of earthing of the DC system The DC system shall not be earthed elsewhere The DC supply source is to be located within the same premises as this equipment Switching or disconnected devices shall not be in the earthed circuit conductor between the DC source and the point of the connection of the earthing electrode conductor Electronic equipment is sensitive to Electrostatic Discharge ESD Observe all ESD precautions and safeguards when handling Spectracom equipment An external AC to DC power adapter powers the NetClock NetClock Instruction Manual 25 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation This International and US Desk Top adapter has a detachable AC power cord to an IEC 320 connector The power adapter is shipped with a line cord compatible with AC receptacles NEMA 5 15R commonly found in the United States and Canada Alternate type line cords or adapters may be obtained locally The chassis ground stud allows the NetClock chassis to be connected to an earth ground or single point ground Connecting the chassis to a single point ground system may be required in some installations to ensure optimum lightning protection An earth ground is also recommended in installations where excessive noise on the power line degrades receiver performance Rack mount ears are provided in the ancillary kit if the NetClock will be installed in a standard 19 inch rack 2 5 Ra
102. CK oo eee eestsenesneenesnssiesseneeisenseiseneeiteneeess 3 5 NetClock Instruction Manual jii 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 4 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 4 5 3 4 6 3 4 1 3 4 8 3 4 9 3 4 10 3 4 11 3 4 12 3 4 13 3 4 14 3 4 15 3 4 16 3 4 17 3 4 18 3 4 19 3 4 20 3 4 21 3 4 22 3 4 23 4 1 1 itil Network SC TUD tis secscess gore ij vevtehas nannan aan a a ed aiaia 3 9 Default and Recommended Configurations sssescsessscseseseesseseteseestesteeteseeetesesnseatensetensetensetensetenses 3 12 Issuing the HALT Command before REMOVING POWED v sssssssesessssesssessssnssesnssnssessssnsseeessessseessnseeeesseeeeey 3 13 Issuing the HALT Command through the Web UL ccsssssessssssessssssussussssessussssssessseesseesseessesseeesseeesey 3 13 Issuing the HALT Command through the Chl ciccneinctvisel aleineedeatatuune ashen da aa tarouatied Neos 3 15 Issuing the HALT Command through SNM B esiessccn teste Mh ets hie a ahead Gr ould hte 3 16 Product Configuration using the WEB Ul siiasndiuiiisaide inna mtnialiana dain wa aiaddnadansiads 3 19 Connu NTP Sen cececctuzacves ctapsdeats can A canna E N A e Ar n AE aAA 3 19 NIES UDDO erar an a A a Tach ee N 3 28 Configuring the Interface ot szsss acevnsstd oes cx aastuca anes es cosvacosdutssovsgatvana tutsacadde tantdats tsesprmraauuts esas ietlgnseatgant 3 29 SYS PIG TIMIN ein tee acs ctne ata aana a a T cued taste A a A AEN 3 44 Configuring he
103. CTS Server Mode Selected NetClock Instruction Manual 7 5 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Time Service Abbreviation This field indicates the source from which a dial out client is receiving Universal Coordinated Time UTC It is inserted in the ACTS timing message sent to the modem client A time service abbreviation of SPEC will appear in the timing message as UTC SPEC DUT1 Value This is a correction factor for converting UTC to an older form of Universal Time The value should always be a number between 8 and 8 seconds Adding DUT1 to UTC produces UT1 a specific measure of time related to the rotation of Earth The three digit string entered in this field appears in the time messages sent to the modem client Leap Second This field allows the user to specify the addition or removal of a leap second as well as the month and year in which this addition or removal will occur The ACTS Server uses this information to notify the modem client of a pending leap second It does so through time messages sent to the modem client Daylight Saving Time This field is used to specify the month and day of the current year in which Daylight Saving Time DST is entered and exited This information is included in the time messages sent to the modem client Modem Configuration File The ACTS Server uses built in Hayes compatible commands to configure the modem Some modems may support additional or different commands which may be required fo
104. Corporation 9300 Series oso erne ore 10 x Eile Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address la http 10 2 128 14 cgi bin main cgi Go K Z D SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations The test feature makes a call immediately or on a scheduled interval The success or failure of this call is written to the log file Test calls are only done while in sync from another time source for testing at other times use the dial now or dial interval options TEST SETTINGS D Test Now I Test On Interval Test Interval Set Interval Every 0 Days fl Hours 0 Minutes Daily Every fo Days At fo foo utc Click here to edit or create local system clocks C Weekly Every fo weeks On F MON F TUE F WED C THU F FRI SAT M SUN At fo foo UTC Click here to edit or create local system clocks Monthly Day fo of every fo month s c First MON of every f0 months At fo foo furca Click here to edit or create local system clocks C Yearly Every JAN z fo At fo foo UTC x Click here to edit or create local system clocks Interface System RelayfSecurity status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us Internet Figure 7 11 Modem Test Screen There are four different types of modem dial out calls that can be made The call type is determined by the state of the system after the call is finishe
105. DHCP Section 3 1 http 10 10 2 102 Microsoft Internet Explorer i x Eile Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Address la htto 10 10 2 102 ais E co e z OF SPECTRACOM Synchronizing Critical Operations Welcome to the Spectracom web based configuration utility Please click the button to connect to the NetClock To protect our customer we require login for all the user actions Enter to the configuration Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Internet Figure 3 1 Entering to the Configuration in the Web UI NetClock Instruction Manual 3 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation When configuring a NetClock without DHCP or to configure a NetClock that has not been assigned an IP address refer to Network Configuration Section 3 2 3 1 Network Configuration with DHCP Once connected to the DHCP server through the network the NetClock is assigned an IP address This address and other network information is displayed on the front panel when the device boots up Enter the IP address in your browser on a computer connected to the network and log in as an administrator The http session will be redirected automatically to an https session and a security certificate pop up window will be displayed Accept the certificate by clicking OK NOTE Unless you are using DNS in conjunction with DHCP with the client configured using the NTP server s hostname instead of IP a
106. Douwles 3 93 Configuring LDAP and RADIUS nnncsisscusoiranirnsiininiupianoaneann nnana 3 97 OUTING M EAE e E AE EA T E T AT EE 3 101 logs and S tatus REPONN G esini a aia A e aa 3 112 DAY TO DAY OPERATION 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 f Event and Alarm Relay OULpUUS sisi ssdectcescssiecs ctaethassatis Suertasdedtias aartheiesdund tEAN ANKKAA ANEKA Meander aa 4 1 Leap Second OCC UT CMe sacvcescesa sce eet Sak raha Nise Dae ald ec ea de hea at Sel tte ca MEO gee EE 4 2 Reasons for a Leap Second Correction sssscssscssssssessessteseeetesseteseeesesneesesaeenseaeenseaeenseaeenseatsnseataseeseenseass 4 2 Leap SCCONGAICTAOLING AION ceaceseasearysesteatesetigl visa thas Geattasds4d cosets oto vaateds Gusdtins be tdtedtnted cats potacasbegtesinetsetatas 4 2 Sequence of a Leap Second Correction Being Applied sssscsssessessessesseesssstestestesnsetesnsenesnsetesnseteaneeess 4 3 SERIAL DATA FORMATS ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccce DT PROUT EDs caus Racecar Bechara entices a a a nana placa ts 5 1 Formatda ea a nE A O n AATE 5 2 Format Ziarna at Va A tt E A N EA daa E edna ARG 5 4 Format Ziani aiian aata na a nia n n 5 6 Format A csc cs Sc Sete cdc wo aes cite vec E es Sede dvd aed A AT ned ei N eia 5 7 Forma tT airn a fh separ aca cesta A ames io a gee tsb Maca ae uc tienda aacten pr taccaaats 5 8 Formator a ar A A aes A aunts usa A a Magita suse A a O ABONA 5 10 FOMA CION Aoa A a A NA 5 11
107. ED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES 2 The 32 bit CRC implementation in crc32 c is due to Gary S Brown Comments in the file indicate it may be used for any purpose without restrictions COPYRIGHT C 1986 Gary S Brown You may use this program or code or tables extracted from it as desired without restriction 3 The 32 bit CRC compensation attack detector in deattack c was contributed by CORE SDI S A under a BSD style license Cryptographic attack detector for ssh source code Copyright c 1998 CORE SDI S A Buenos Aires Argentina All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that this copyright notice is retained THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL CORE SDI S A BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPL
108. ENS Y20 67 17 YEAR TENS Y40 68 18 YEAR TENS Y80 69 PID P7 POSITION IDENTIFIER 70 19 SPACE 71 20 SPACE 72 21 SPACE 73 22 SPACE 74 23 SPACE 75 24 SPACE 76 25 SPACE 77 26 SPACE 78 27 SPACE 79 PID P8 POSITION IDENTIFIER 80 28 SBS 20 81 29 SBS 21 82 30 SBS 22 83 31 SBS 23 84 32 SBS 24 85 33 SBS 25 86 34 SBS 26 87 35 SBS 27 88 36 SBS 28 89 PID P9 POSITION IDENTIFIER 90 37 SBS 29 91 38 SBS 210 92 39 SBS 211 93 40 SBS 212 94 41 SBS 213 95 42 SBS 214 96 43 SBS 215 97 44 SBS 216 98 45 SPACE 99 PID PO POSITION IDENTIFIER Table 3 4 IRIG E Control Function Field 3 40 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 5 OSO erne ore o x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Address la http 10 10 2 102 cgi bin main cgi E co E Z D PECTRACOM You have logged in as admin ynchronizing ing Critical Operations LCD 1 Configuration DISPLAY FORMAT Network x TIME FORMAT 24 Hour gt SYSTEM CLOCK utc a Click here to edit or create local system clocks LCD 2 Configuration DISPLAY FORMAT Dete Time x TIME FORMAT 24 Hour gt SYSTEM CLOCK utc x Click here to edit or create local system clocks DATE FORMAT MM_DD_YYYY FONT Arial x Submit Reset MA SEN E e SET Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us E Internet Figure 3 41 Interface Front Panel Display Screen Th
109. Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Address http 10 10 2 102 cgi bin main cgi z Synchronizing Critical Operations D SPECIRACOM You have logged in as admin Journal Log Mar 16 22 48 32 Spectracom spectracom admin WEB Network IP Address changed from 10 10 128 58 to 10 10 2 102 Mar 16 22 48 39 Spectracom spectracom admin WEB Network IPv4 DHCP Disabled Mar 16 22 50 08 Spectracom spectracom admin WEB Remote Output 2 Data Format was changed from 0 to 2 Mar 16 22 50 19 Spectracom spectracom admin WEB Remote Output 2 Data Format was changed from 2 to 0 Apr 20 20 22 07 Spectracom spectracom admin MEB Local Clock at index 1 Activated Apr 20 20 22 07 Spectracom spectracom admin MEB Local Clock Name at index 1 set to Rochester Apr 20 20 22 07 Spectracom spectracom admin WEB Local Clock Rochester Time Zone Type was changed from Manual to Auto Apr 20 20 22 07 Spectracom spectracom admin MEB Local Clock Rochester DST Type was changed from None to Week and Day Apr 24 17 38 28 Spectracom spectracom admin WEB NTP service disabled Apr 24 17 38 51 Spectracom spectracom admin WEB NTP service enabled Apr 24 18 38 48 Spectracom spectracom admin VEB Relay 1 Test Initiated DS AE ST REN SY SEEN Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us ome lip internet Figure 3 98 Journal Log Screen Whenever a user changes the NetClock s configurat
110. Event and Alarm Relay Contacts vsedectza pecosea cas ducd pence secteasea ties dove hesdusdpabivsataceuntaialvadascareeaebeabemnaneads 4 1 Figure fe MOUS S WICE S ngeenei nenea Nainital aun acit Minit nic vine Rita ts 7 2 Figure 7 2 System Modem Configuration Screen Console Mode sssri 7 3 Figure 7 3 System Modem Configuration Screen Client Mode essessssessesstestesteseestestesnseesnseatenseneensetenseseenees 7 4 Figure 7 4 ACTS Server Mode Selected sescsessscsesssceesesstesesstesneesesnseseseetesneenseaeenseaeenseaeenseatenseseeseeatenseatanseatenses 7 5 Figure 7 5 ACTS SSWEPGICCUNOhacuscstutatinnnenataisaainemastudnahaiaaiituaduniadakieduntalennan 7 7 Figure 7 6 ACTS Server Statistics ccs tees beesee test edspdiastesiu steed caavesed tits dedtodiocedslttasaatencosad teh aaasiessachassaetaneencesloccartane 7 8 PUM ACTS Server LOG sects sas hat mrtg laa ata ceases feos cle ON nha atl a hala ne Le uals Dad iain dela Seema 7 9 Figure 7 8 System Modem Dial Out Screen 1 0f 2 ni tsiainci eRe delnmta hatin ainedsiiiaheuah Naa 7 11 Figure 7 9 System Modem Dial Out Screen 2 of 2 scsscvcssissicaceesduves dass teas dussevusdisstiecvenseattauwten raven vasdiuievan keels 7 12 Figure 7 10 System Modem Calibrate Screenis i cnscse seis anienind ieiiane dein dtaedanenenineianies 7 13 Figure 7 11 Modem TeStS Clee sa 5 wcntacnsAwwe han tariies anenssaramtavtenad Nester tetvarisaersataibavanan oa EEEE EEEE EEEE 7 15 Figure 7 12 Modem Dial
111. GPS signal from at least four satellites at least once for a brief duration Connect the GPS cable to the rear panel antenna input jack on the back of the NetClock Verify the NetClock front panel Sync lamp illuminates green Synchronization may take up to 20 minutes approximately It may take another 20 to 30 minutes for NTP to synchronize in turn Individual networked devices will not be able to synchronize until NTP does If supplied with Option 03 Dial out Modem connect the dial out modem to the rear panel Setup port Change the console client mode of operation to Modem using the Web User Interface Configure the NetClock front panel LCDs as desired using the Web User Interface Interface the NetClock to wall display clocks and other peripheral devices as needed Configure each of the rear panel outputs to these devices for desired local times baud rates and Data Formats using either the Web User Interface or the serial setup port Each port is separately configured so each port used may need to be configured for your desired configuration If using a 9388 unit configure the data formats to match NOTE Unless you are using DNS in conjunction with DHCP with the client configured using 13 14 the NTP server s hostname instead of IP address DHCP must be disabled and the IP address must be changed to a static address once the NetClock is properly configured Failure to do this will result in a loss of time synchronization if
112. H E tfNtpObjs H E ntpy4mib B S specTimeFregEvents H E tfeventsv2info i specTimeViewMIB ic snmpv2 a Critical 11 26 2007 11 40 22 10 10 128 39 Device Down For Help press F1 e Gee cel Figure 3 22 Rebooting the Unit through SNMP To Reboot the unit select YES and select the SET check box in the upper left corner of the SNMPc management console application The Set operation reports success but can with some SNMP managers return Set Unsuccessful due to a race condition in rebooting the unit and replying over SNMP This is not an error To Halt the unit select HALT and select the SET checkbox Figure 3 23 NetClock Instruction Manual 3 17 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation SNMPc Management Console laj xj File Edit view Insert Manage Tools Config Window Help 44 5 S D S Ma Oi P S gt Mal AAI 10 70 12828 A aalas E tfSystemObjsInfo 10 10 128 38 5 x iiSystemObisinfo B E Snmp Mibs a Custom Tables H mmt B private H E CastleRock lanmanager spectracom S E specReg specModules specTimeFregProducts B specProducts specTimeFreg MIB H E specTimeFreqConfs B spectimeFreqObjs tfSystemObjs H tfSysTestTable tfSystemObjsInfo H E tfRefReceiver m tfinterface H E tfRelayEventObjs H E tflocalClockObjs tfNtpObjs H E ntpvamib Sy spectimeFregEvents a tfEvents 2InFo H E specTimev
113. IPv4 requests I Allow queries from NTPDC or NTPQ over IPv4 M Service all IPv6 requests by default I Require Authentication for IPv6 requests I Allow queries from NTPDC or NTPQ over IPV6 Auth Enable Type IPv4 IPv6 IP Address Hostname IP Mask Only Query Empty z IPv6 m Empty z IPv4 m l Empty _ IPv4 m l Empty v IPv4 Empty z IPv4 x 0 0 00 0 0 00 NOTE NTP Access can only be configured while the NTP Service is disabled Submit Reset INTPJintertace system Relay Security status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Done 10 10 2101 amp 4 Refer to Figure 3 27 The user can enable or completely disable the NTP Service enabled the NTP Service operates in unicast mode 3 20 Figure 3 27 NTP General Screen When In unicast mode the NTP Service NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series responds to NTP requests only The NTP Service supports a broadcast mode in which it sends a NTP time packet to the network broadcast address Check the box for NTP Broadcast to enable broadcast mode and select a rate at which to broadcast from the dropdown box The NTP Broadcast mode is intended for 1 or a few servers and many clients The NTP Broadcast rate should be selected bas
114. LUE ltc ltc COMMAND INDEX NAME net net COMMAND Arguments sys sys COMMAND Arguments ser ser COMMAND SERIAL Arguments ren rem COMMAND REMOTE Arguments irig irig COMMAND ARG frq fra COMMAND INDEX Arguments admin 1 16 128 38 gt admin 1 10 128 38 gt admin 16 16 128 38 gt reboot cmd command Broadcast message from root Mon Nov 26 16 24 69 2607 The system is going down for reboot NOW reboot admin 1 1 128 38 gt Figure 3 20 Rebooting the System from the CLI 3 3 3 Issuing the HALT Command through SNMP The Reboot MIB location options in the NetClock Figure 3 21 are as follows e HALT to shutdown NOTE Wait 30 seconds after shutting down before removing power e NO to do nothing e YES to reboot the NetClock iai xi File Edit yiew Insert Manage Tools Config Window Help aalala Se Oli OS gt Mal Al 1010 12838 S iSystemObjsinfo 28 oai DE e a xix oA Aeae O private UpTime 00 000 00 02 18 a Castlerock SerialNum 121 lanmanager Temperature 28 0 spectracom hed js D specreg aa H specModules m E specTimeFregProducts 11715 2007 3 specProducts BootRev Nt H specTimeFreqMIB SyncStat sync specTimeFreqConfs TimeSource aps specTimeFreqObjs ModemStat UNKNOWN 5 tfsystemobjs TimeYear 2007 H tfSysTestTable TimaMonth 11 E
115. NETCLOCK TIME SERVER 9300 SERIES INSTRUCTION MANUAL 95 Methodist Hill Drive Rochester NY 14623 Phone US 1 585 321 5800 Fax US 1 585 321 5219 www spectracomcorp com Part Number 1 165 5000 0050 Manual Rev G I July 2009 Copyright 2009 Spectracom Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without the written permission of Spectracom Corporation Printed in USA Specifications subject to change or improvement without notice Spectracom NetClock Ageless TimeGuard TimeBurst TimeTap LineTap MultiTap VersaTap and legally Traceable Time are Spectracom registered trademarks All other products are identified by trademarks of their respective companies or organizations All rights reserved SPECTRACOM LIMITED WARRANTY LIMITED WARRANTY Spectracom warrants each new product manufactured and sold by it to be free from defects in software material workmanship and construction except for batteries fuses or other material normally consumed in operation that may be contained therein AND AS NOTED BELOW for five years after shipment fo the original purchaser which period is referred to as the warranty period This warranty shall not apply if the product is used contrary to the instructions in its manual or is otherwise subjected to misuse abnormal operations accident lightning or transient surge repairs or modifications not performed by Spectracom The GPS receiver i
116. NMPv3 Type Auth Passphrase m Priv Passphrase m 10 10 1 a INTP interface SystemJRelay Security status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us https 10 10 2 103 cgi bin showsnmpsecconf cgi 10 10 2103 amp 4 Figure 3 81 SNMP Security Screen 3 of 3 NetClock Instruction Manual 3 95 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Main Menu Mozilla Firefox i zigjxi File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help 3 SP SS Blo htps 10 10 2 103 cg bin man coi 8 B Gfx cole 4 D SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations LDAP server type Active Directory on Windows Server 2000 2003 z Services allowed to use an LDAP sever for authentication Note Select and test one service at a time to prevent a potential user lockout condition Console login Telnet O FTP l SSHISFTP SCP LC HTTP HTTPS Submit Reset GES OS SE E SEMEN TET Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Done 10 10 2 103 amp Figure 3 82 Security LDAP General Screen 3 96 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 3 4 21 Configuring LDAP and RADIUS From the Security LDAP General screen Figure 3 82 the user chooses the LDAP server type it must be the correct one check with your LDAP server administrator if you are not sure a
117. NetClock 3 118 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series Main Menu Mozilla Firefox ES File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Help S D ZB O Q O hps 0 10 128 8fcg binman co am a C mw F e c alinone asp An Insider s Guide to C Building a Better Voca Ultimate Vocabulary Exercise 7c Mental SORFEALRES O SPECIRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations IKE Log 2007 03 12 15 03 00 INFO Hipsec tools 0 6 6 http vipsec tools sourceforge net 2007 03 12 15 03 00 INFO G This product linked OpenSSL 0 9 7i fips 14 Oct 2005 httpwww openssl org 2007 03 12 15 03 00 INFO 127 0 0 1 500 used as isakmp port fd 20 2007 03 12 15 03 00 INFO 10 10 128 8 500 used as isakmp port fd 21 2007 03 12 15 03 01 INFO 1 500 used as isakrnp port fd 22 2007 03 12 15 03 01 INFO fe80 230 64ff fe04 4 afd ethO 500 used as isakmp port fd 23 2007 03 12 15 03 02 INFO unsupported PF_KEY message REGISTER 2007 03 12 15 03 02 INFO unsupported PF_KEY message 0 2007 03 12 15 03 02 INFO unsupported PF_KEY message 0 2007 03 12 15 03 03 INFO caught signal 15 2007 03 12 15 03 03 INFO unsupported PF_KEY message 0 2007 03 12 15 03 04 INFO racoon shutdown 2007 03 12 15 03 06 INFO ipsec tools 0 6 6 http vipsec tools sourceforge net 2007 03 12 15 03 06 INFO GThis product linked OpenSSL 0 9 7i fips 1
118. Now Warning Do not remove power for at least 30 seconds after requesting halt Halt Now NTP interface SE EN Security status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Done 10 10 2101 amp Figure 3 56 System Reboot Screen NOTE lf you wish to restore your NetClock to its Factory Default settings click the checkbox labeled Restore Factory Defaults and then click the Reboot Now button Remember that restoring the system to Factory Default settings DOES NOT REMOVE POSITION DATA FROM THE NETCLOCK Refer to Section 3 4 7 for information on configuring GPS and deleting position data To restore the NetClock to its factory state completely perform the following steps e Disconnect the NetClock s GPS antenna This stops the unit from tracking satellites NetClock Instruction Manual 3 6 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation e Reset GPS from the System GPS page SAASM users perform Emergency Zeroize This deletes the stored position in the GPS receiver and restarts the self survey which will commence when the GPS antenna is reattached and power is applied to the unit e From the System Reboot Halt screen select the Restore Factory Defaults option and issue the HALT command This will shut down the Netclock You may now remove power from the unit e The next unit startup once power is applied to the unit will take roughly 30 60 seconds longer than normal beca
119. O 6 im 45 z 10 17m 4s z None z O O 6 fim 4s z 10 17m 4s z None z C 0 6 1m 4s 10 17m 45 None O a O 6 fim 4s z 10 17m 4s z None z O T 6 1m 4s z 10 17m 4s z None z O an Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series From the Symmetrical Keys screen Figure 3 30 the user may define the trusted symmetrical keys that must be entered on both the NetClock and any network client with which the NetClock is to communicate The maximum number of Key ID Key String pairs is 15 Only those keys for which the Trusted box has been checked will appear in the dropdown menus on the NTP References screen Figure 3 28 Main Menu Mozilla Firefox lol x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help gt S O hitps 10 10 2 103 eg bin main cgi S gt Glz coogi 4 O oPECTRACO M You have logged in as admin NTP Symmetrical Keys aj Trusted 44 E Pee hani ee a o JCC o COJO m a a o CO Eyyy m a a a o EO Se Se Fl S o Cj iE m ee ee Fs eS Submit _Reset zl De A SNS EN SIM SCAT Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Dane 10 10 2 103 amp 4 Figure 3 30 NTP Symmetrical Keys Screen NOTE t may be necessary to enter your username and password again in order to access the Symmetrical Keys screen NetClock Instructi
120. PGGA GPS Fix data format The Format 90 data structure is shown below GPGGA HHMMSS SS ddmm mmmm n dddmm mmmm e Q SS YY y tAAAAA a M CC CR LF where GP GPS System Talker GGA GPS Fix Data Message HHMMSS SS Latest time of Position Fix UTC This field is blank until a 3D fix is acquired ddmm mmmm n Latitude dd degress 00 90 mm mmmm minutes 00 0000 59 9999 n direction N North S South dddmm mmmm e Longitude ddd degress 000 180 mm mmmm minutes 00 0000 59 9999 e direction E East W West Q Quality Indicator 0 No 3D fix 1 3D fix SS Number of satellites tracked 0 8 YY Y Dilution of precision 00 0 99 9 AAAAA a M Antenna height in meters referenced to mean sea level T Fields for geoidal separation and differential GPS not supported cc Check sum message HEX 00 7F Check sum calculated by Xoring all bytes between and CR Carriage Return LF Line Feed Example GPGAA 151119 00 4307 0241 N 07729 2249 W 1 06 03 2 00125 5 M 3F The example data stream provides the following information Time of Position Fix 15 11 19 00 UTC Latitude 43 07 0241 North Longitude 77 29 2249 West Quality 3D fix Satellites Used 6 Dilution of Precision 3 2 Antenna Height 125 5 meters above sea level Check Sum 3 NetClock Instruction Manual 5 11 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporatio
121. Poll in the NTP References grids allow the user to choose from within the available ranges how often the NetClock will poll the defined servers NetClock Instruction Manual 3 23 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation for timing information Check with your network administrator for guidelines regarding network traffic and recommended polling intervals if any Main Menu Mozilla Firefox File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help gt E gt S i O https 10 10 2 101 cgi bin main cgi G z Google BJ ECTRACOM ing Critical Operations You have logged in as admin ee ae ee eer ee El NTP Servers NTP Servers specified in the following table are used only as potential time references If a server is chosen by the NetClock as the best reference the stratum level of the NetClock will drop to one above the stratum level of the chosen server M Enable Stratum O Reference ie GPS Modem Serial Time Code NOTE When enabled the Stratum 0 reference is ALWAYS preferred Submit Reset ITP interface system Relay security status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Dre tsNSCSCSOSSS EE E 3 24 Figure 3 29 NTP References Screen 2 of 2 NetClock Instruction Manual Server a IPv4 IPv6 Hostname Preferred Min Poll Max Poll sym Key Autokey Cle
122. S 485 and Serial RS 232 Comm ports 2 8 1 Serial Comm Ports The rear panel of the 9300 Series has two RS 232 SERIAL COMM ports that are available to synchronize peripheral devices These ports can provide RS 232 output data to synchronize external devices that can accept RS 232 Data Formats as an input The Serial Ports can provide RS 232 data in one of two modes The Interrogation mode provides a one time RS 232 time stamp each time that the port receives a request character from the external device In between the requests for time there is no output The Multicast mode broadcasts the time stamp every second The Interrogation mode is the factory default This mode should be changed to Multicast mode in the web browser user interface if the external device being synchronized does not send a request character for the time but rather just listens for the time to be sent every second The configuration of the data including the baud rate the Data Format the request character in the Interrogation mode Time Zone Offsets and Daylight Saving Time rules is chosen from the web browser user interface The Serial Ports have a standard RS 232 pin configuration as shown in Figure 2 5 and Table 2 2 Figure 2 5 Serial Port Pin Configuration PPIN ST SIGNAL VOC DESCRIPTION 2 S P Siea ae data to a device re o data from a device 5 enb f Signa Common 6 DSR JO Data SetReady s dets o gt CleartoSend O
123. SEN EERE EET Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved z HMacMDS m O esce TE Jo HMacMDS m O esee J Jo HMacMDS m eese J Jo HMACMDS O eese o m l Pees cee Zalo ma a o e Jo HMacMDsS e O esee TF Jo fHMacMDS e O esee TF o HMacMDS O esce EJ Jo HMacMDS oes a E Faas es cec Ee __ rw es lf Faas eset lf Faas ese Cif AMAC MDS SDES CeC Contact us 10 10 2108 4 Figure 3 91 IPSec Manual SA Configuration 2 of 2 NetClock Instruction Manual 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 3 4 22 7 2 Configure IPSec Security Policy Configure the IPSec security policy from the IPSec General screen Figure 3 92 NOTE The manual SA values must be configured BEFORE the manual SA option is enabled from the IPSec General screen Figure 3 92 If the feature is enabled before it is configured from the IPSec Manual SA Configuration screen the SA and SP tables will not update correctly Main Menu Mozilla Firefox 5 x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help ie gt GF O https 10 10 2 103 eg bin main cgi S Cl coge B D SPE CT RAC O M You have logged in as admin S
124. SERIAL SETUP INTERFACE COMMANDS c00c0000000000000000000000000000 61T UMC ionainn iia at AR ANa AE NAA E AETA msn aie nied TERA A AT na 6 1 DOO Esra aa a tual a a Auten AANA A N 6 1 ME a E A a 1 ae et Aerials ach a A a a a a Aa 6 2 Opo Ni nea n E 6 2 VE EEn NT ce EEEE E EA EAE TE TO ae Nh A cB NC Mtg 6 2 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 6 6 A lace sezssateecints Gace eat neous a access aati Dace ndecaves baud coat veces Da hd yee Packanatwaiaba an teati 6 3 6 7 Gi Sra ath iatcanaees tung a tetas oe tan aah aaa teeta a nm as heated a ke antics 6 3 6 8 MAO ene tetas caedtnavteatsahsaaahip cates taatasctsta S 6 3 6 9 SS case ecg eben sd cepa ea Sat tec elope ag dud edn date Beas bts hapa hares 6 4 6 10 TeMi cvteusazh ea vanslvatees dewaaucs rade a a a aa teatvi a a tltalavenets 6 4 bll Higenn en a a kata an aden ah a e i a ala 6 4 Ol fesi a eee ewe anenrae daha Mahe ina mndd Moanin eens we 6 5 GUS YSU E E A ta tacaas aguas tamara Rees Us tere hag ck A T 6 5 7 OPTIONS 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000600 T 7 1 Option 03 Modem zla eenean a a a a a a a a 7 1 TAD Option 03 BabiGSi sinnena Med a da OAA 7 1 L2 Modem nstallatioiizcasascndvndvndatainicnin miami ine ane een a a 7 2 7 1 3 Modem Configuration ster shunts taissta scunce ss sisate teach ee tees earaanacin esraaratiachaetucsrads anche deseecardtia Re Mesceannte demeacaat 7 2 TAG ACTS Serer Modenan detente naa n SA
125. SINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Part 5 Sparta Inc copyright notice BSD Copyright c 2003 2004 Sparta Inc All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING
126. Split Bus Configuration 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation NOTE Most RS 485 connections found on Spectracom equipment are made using a removable terminal strip A jaw that compresses the wires when tightened secures the wires When using small diameter wire 22 26 gauge a strain relief can be fashioned by wrapping the stripped wire over the insulating jacket Wrapping the wires in this manner prevents smaller gauge wires from breaking off when exposed to handling or movement STRIP WIRE WRAP WIRE OVER INSULATING JACKET INSERT WRAPPED END AND TIGHTEN Figure 2 10 Wire Strain Relief TimeView display clocks use a 6 position terminal block to connect to the RS 485 data bus Connect the TimeView to the NetClock RS 485 Output as shown in Figure 2 11 The TimeView display clocks accept only Data Formats 0 or 1 NETCLOCK Twisted Pair TO TIMEVIEW REMOTE OUTPUT o RS 485 IN OUT TO OTHER RS 485 DEVICES 3 POSITION TERMINAL BLOCK Figure 2 11 TimeView RS 485 Interface The Model 8179T TimeTap is an RS 485 to RS 232 converter The Model 8179T has a DB9 RS 232 interface that receives operational power from the RS 232 flow control pins RTS or DTR Connect the TimeTap to the RS 485 data bus as shown in Figure 2 12 2 16 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation Model 9300 Series TO MODEL 8179T TIMETAP NETCLOCK REMOTE OUTPUT Twisted Pair 3 POSITION 5 POSITION TERMINAL BLOCK TERMINAL BLOCK Figure 2 12 Mod
127. Splitter The GPS Antenna Splitter Model 8224 is designed for use with an existing antenna cable setup It eliminates the need and expense for a second antenna cable run when two synchronization systems are desirable The Model 8224 should be installed indoors 2 6 4 Model 8226 Impulse Suppressor Spectracom recommends the use of an inline coaxial protector for all products with an outside antenna Spectracom offers the Model 8226 Impulse Suppressor to protect the receiver from damaging voltages occurring on the antenna coax Voltages exceeding the impulse suppresser trip point are shunted to the system ground The Model 8226 is designed to withstand multiple surges Two LMR 400 field installable N type connectors are provided with the Model 8226 to splice in the surge suppressor wherever it must be placed However the recommended method to avoid having to cut the antenna cable is to determine the desired location of the Model 8226 ahead of time and then order two lengths of pre terminated cables instead of just one long cable that spans the entire distance between the antenna and the NetClock Mount the suppressor indoors preferably where the coax enters the building Install the suppressor on a grounding panel or bulkhead as shown in Figure 2 3 Spectracom offers a grounding kit that includes grounding cable clamps mounting bracket and ground plane The Spectracom Part Number for this kit is 8226 0002 0600 Contact our Sales department
128. System Clock Service Leap second inserted at end of month B An example log entry for a Negative Leap Second is as follows TIME 23 59 59 DATE 2005 12 31 System Clock Service Leap second removed at end of month NetClock Instruction Manual 4 3 9300 Series 4 4 Spectracom Corporation NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 5 Serial Data Formats This section describes each of the Data Format selections available on the RS 232 Serial Comm and RS 485 Remote Port outputs Format selection is made as part of the Serial Comm and Remote port configuration Most applications utilize either Data Format 0 or Data Format 2 5 1 Format 0 Format 0 includes a time synchronization status character day of year time reflecting Time Zone Offset and DST corrections when enabled Format 0 also includes the DST Standard Time indicator and the Time Zone Offset value Format 0 data structure is shown below CRLF I DDD HH MM SS DTZ XX CR LF where CR Carriage Return LF Line Feed Time Sync Status space A space separator DDD Day of Year 001 366 HH Hours 00 23 Colon separator MM Minutes 00 59 SS Seconds 00 60 Daylight Saving Time indicator S I D O TZ Time Zone XX Time Zone offset 00 23 The leading edge of the first character CR marks the on time point of the data stream The time synchronization status character is defined as described below
129. Tools Help gt o i O htps 10 10 50 20 eg bin main cgi Sla gt Ge coogie GJ LI Customize Links _ Free Hotmail Windows Marketplace Windows Media Windows D SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations ITP interface System Relay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Done 10 10 50 20 amp 4 Figure 3 45 System Menu The System menu groups the NetClock s various system configuration functions Figure 3 45 From this menu the user may access screens for SNMP Alarms GPS System Time Local System Clocks System mode Modem Configuration if the NetClock includes the modem option Reboot Holdover and Log Configuration NOTE Refer to Options for modem configuration and related screens If your NetClock does not have the modem option which is activated at the factory the modem menu links will not appear on the System screen If you purchase the Modem option after receipt NetClock Instruction Manual 3 45 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation of your NetClock system Spectracom will provide you with a product key for modem activation e OSO erne plore loj xj Eile Edit View Favorites Tools Help a Qa O x 2 FA search Se Favorites K A7 ial A 33 Address la http 10 2 128 14 cgi bin main cgi Go E is D SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin S
130. Traps are 3 46 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series asynchronous status messages sent from NetClock to the locations specified in the SNMP security screens 3 4 5 1 Spectracom MIB Spectracom has been assigned the enterprise identifier 18837 by the IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority Spectracom s MIB for its time and frequency products resides under this enterprise identifier 18837 3 1 which is illustrated below mgmt experimental private 3 4 m ib 2 enterprises 1 spectracom 18837 specProducts 3 specTimeFreqMIB 1 Figure 3 47 Spectracom s MIB 3 4 5 2 SNMP Support Spectracom s private enterprise MIB can be obtained from the Spectracom Customer Service department via email It can also be obtained via File Transfer Protocol FTP from the NetClock using an FTP agent such as Microsoft FTP CoreFTP or any other shareware freeware FTP program To obtain the MIB file via FTP using your FTP program log in as an administrator and change the file transfer mode to binary The Spectracom MIB files are located in the MIBS directory and include global time frequency and NTPv4 files There is a Global generic MIB file and a NetClock specific MIB file called Time and Frequency FTP the files to the desired location on your PC for later transfer to the SNMP Manager The MIB files may then be compiled onto the SNMP Manager NOTE When compiling the MIB files some SNMP M
131. UREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 6 One component of the ssh source code is under a 4 clause BSD license held by the University of California since we pulled these parts from original Berkeley code The Regents of the University of California have declared that term 3 is no longer enforceable on their source code but we retain that license as is Copyright c 1983 1990 1992 1993 1995 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes software developed by the Univer
132. Unixwarel port 41 45 Michael Shields lt shields tembel org gt USNO clock driver 42 46 Jeff Steinman lt jss pebbles jpl nasa gov gt Datum PTS clock driver 43 47 Harlan Stenn lt harlan pfcs com gt GNU automake autoconfigure makeover various other bits see the ChangeLog 44 48 Kenneth Stone lt ken sdd hp com gt HP UX port 45 49 Ajit Thyagarajan lt ajit ee udel edu gt IP multicast anycast support 46 50 Tomoaki TSURUOKA lt tsuruoka nc fukuoka u ac jp gt TRAK clock NetClock Instruction Manual 9300 Series driver 47 51 Paul A Vixie lt vixie vix com gt TrueTime GPS driver generic TrueTime clock driver 48 52 Ulrich Windl lt Ulrich Windlerz uni regensburg de gt corrected and validated HTML documents according to the HTML DTD 53 gif 54 David L Mills lt mills udel edu gt References mailto marka syd dms csiro au mailto altmeier atlsoft de mailto vbais mailmanl intel co mailto kirkwood striderfm intel com mailto michael barone lmco com mailto karl owl HQ ileaf com mailto greg brackley bigfoot com mailto Marc Brett westgeo com 9 mailto Piete Brooks cl cam ac uk 10 mailto reg dwf com 11 mailto clifteml csiro au 12 mailto casey csc co za 13 mailto Sven_Dietrichetrimble CoM 14 mailto dundas salt jpl nasa gov 15 mailto duwe immd4 informatik uni erlangen de 16 mailto dennis mrbill canet ca 17 mailto glenn herald usask ca 18 mailto iglesias uci edu 19 mailto jagub
133. Whenever the front panel Time Sync lamp is green When the receiver is unable to track any satellites and the Time Sync lamp is red When the receiver time is derived from the battery backed clock or set manual through the Setup Port Interface The Daylight Saving Time indicator D is defined as S During periods of Standard time for the selected DST schedule During the 24 hour period preceding the change into DST D During periods of Daylight Saving Time for the selected DST schedule O During the 24 hour period preceding the change out of DST Example 271 12 45 36 DTZ 08 The example data stream provides the following information Sync Status Time synchronized to GPS NetClock Instruction Manual 5 1 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Date Day 271 Time 12 45 36 Pacific Daylight Time D DST Time Zone 08 Pacific Time 5 2 Format 1 This format provides the fully decoded time data stream Format 1 converts the received day of year data 001 366 to a date consisting of day of week month and day of the month Format 1 also contains a time synchronization status character year and time reflecting time zone offset and DST correction when enabled Format 1 data structure is shown below CRLF I WWW DDMMMYY HH MM SS CR LF where CR Carriage Return LF Line Feed Time Sync Status space Space separator WWW Day of Week SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT DD Numerical Day of Month 41 31 MMM Month
134. a Formats or NTP time stamps to correct for a Leap Second occurrence The NetClock will make the correction at the right time However because computers and other systems may not utilize the time every second the Leap second correction may be delayed until the next scheduled interval unless the software properly handles the advance notice of a pending Leap Second and applies the correction at the right time 4 2 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 3 The Dynamic System Information box in the System Status page located under the web page of Status and Logs will display a Leap Second Status box indicating 1 or 1 Leap second adjustment at the end of the month to users during the entire calendar month preceding the actual adjustment 4 2 3 Sequence of a Leap Second Correction Being Applied 1 The following is the time output sequence that the 9300 Series will utilize to apply the Leap second at UTC midnight Not local time midnight The Local time at which the adjustment is made will depend on which Time Zone you are located in A Sequence of seconds output when adding a leap second 56 57 58 59 60 0 1 2 3 B Sequence of seconds output when removing Leap seconds 56 57 58 0 1 2 3 4 2 An entry will be made in the Operational log that the time was adjusted for a Leap Second A An example log entry for a Positive Leap Second is as follows TIME 23 59 59 DATE 2005 12 31
135. a private key bit length the certificates expiration in days and at least one of the remaining fields It is recommended that the user consult their Certificate Authority for the required fields in an x509 certificate request Spectracom recommends all fields be filled out and match the information given to your certificate authority For example use all abbreviations spellings URLs and company departments recognized by the Certificate Authority This helps in avoiding issues with the Certificate Authority having issues to reconciling certificate request and company record information Main Menu Mozilla Firefox o x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help i S 0 btps 10 10 2 101 cg bin main cgi 4 gt Ge coagle be D SPECTRACOM You have lagged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations Self Signed Certificate Expiration Days 7300 l Certificate Request BEGIN CERTIFICATE REQUEST MIIBvjCCAScCAQAwaTELMAkGA1UEBhMCVYMxCzAJ BgNVBAgTAkSZMRIwEAYDVOQOH EwlSb2NoZXNOZXIxIzAhBgNVBAoTGLNwZWNOcmFjb20gQ029ycG9yY ERpb24gVVNB MROwEgYDVOQQDEwsxMC4xMC4yLjEwMTCBnzANBgkqhkiG9wOBAQEFAAOBJQAwgYkC gYEAmR1GhLe0GCI wSXKH205o0TYwRrxodSY 3 f NUQou2vSzpFN2UJkOb1CqeUISnDA 2 OS CWOH qmHhPdat ytbg 80Xzwhvo bOHqg M 7 JSU6cHOz f AmMUHDDPs4k0Lh9 gkzkSxbyh3fathrXEnhaiEBAWB3xyf funD2J8i1RVsNgNnkCAwEAAsAVMBNGCSqG SIb3DQEJBzEGEwROZXNOMADGCSqGSIb3DQEBBAUAA4GBAGCbw5
136. ainer 10 11 Steve Clift lt clifteml csiro au gt OMEGA clock driver 11 12 Casey Crellin lt casey csc co za gt vxWorks Tornado port and help with target configuration 12 13 Sven Dietrich lt sven_dietrichetrimble com gt Palisade reference clock driver NT adj residuals integrated Greg s Winnt port 13 14 John A Dundas III lt dundas salt jpl nasa gov gt Apple A UX port 14 15 Torsten Duwe lt duwe immd4 informatik uni erlangen de gt Linux port 15 16 Dennis Ferguson lt dennis mrbill canet ca gt foundation code for NTP Version 2 as specified in RFC 1119 16 17 Glenn Hollinger lt glenn herald usask ca gt GOES clock driver 17 18 Mike Iglesias lt iglesias uci edu gt DEC Alpha port 18 19 Jim Jagielski lt jim jagubox gsfc nasa gov gt A UX port 19 20 Jeff Johnson lt jbj chatham usdesign com gt massive prototyping overhaul 20 21 Hans Lambermont lt Hans Lambermont nl origin it com gt or 22 lt H Lambermont chello nl gt ntpsweep 21 23 Poul Henning Kamp lt phk FreeBSD ORG gt Oncore driver Original author 22 24 Frank Kardel 25 lt Frank Kardel informatik uni erlangen de gt PARSE lt GENERIC gt driver 14 reference clocks STREAMS modules for PARSE support scripts syslog cleanup 23 26 William L Jones lt jones hermes chpc utexas edu gt RS 6000 AIX modifications HPUX modifications 24 27 Dave Katz lt dkatz cisco com gt RS 6000 AIX port 25 28 Craig Leres lt leres ee 1bl gov gt
137. al 7 1 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 7 1 2 Modem Installation The provided DB9 to DB9 null modem cable connects to the rear of the modem using a DB9 to DB25 adapter also provided NOTE The switches on the rear of the modem Figure 7 1 inset must be set for proper operation Set Switches 3 and 8 down All other switches should be up 1 Connect one DB9 side of the null modem cable to the to the Serial Setup port located on the rear of the NetClock Connect the other end of the cable to the provided adapter and connect the adapter to the modem 2 Connect the CAT2 telephone cable from the analog phone line to the modem 3 Connect the modem power adapter to a power outlet Figure 7 1 Modem Switches 7 1 3 Modem Configuration The modem is configured from the System Modem Configuration screen which includes the Port mode pull down menu The modem is connected to the Serial Setup port for normal operation The pull down menu allows the operator to select the mode in which the serial setup port will operate Two options are available Console mode and Client mode The screen and the menu available at the left of the screen vary depending on the mode 7 2 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series Console Mode In this mode Figure 7 2 Serial Setup port can be connected with a serial cable to a computer with a serial terminal program running The serial setup software commands can then be used to in
138. ame on the unit and on the management station NetClock Instruction Manual 3 93 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Main Menu Mozilla Firefox File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help gt S f O https 10 10 2 103 eg bin main cgi Sla gt Glz coge BJ You have logged in as admin Yd a cae ee j E ee CO E sh SNMP v3 Users Auth Type Auth Passphrase Priv Passphrase None None Moen None None J None EY None Te None None z None _ None z SNMP Notification Destinations Engine ID Dest IP Port SNMPv3 pe n e eiA 162 e Submit bh 4 INTP interface systemJRelay Security status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us https 10 10 2 103 cgi bin showsnmpsecconf cgi 10 10 2103 amp 4 Figure 3 80 SNMP Security Screen 2 of 3 NOTE When selecting an engine ID for SNMPv3 pick an arbitrary hexadecimal number such as 0x1234 3 94 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series Main Menu Mozilla Firefox File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help S gt S GB LO tps 10 10 2 103 eg bin main cgi G Google S You have logged in as admin iers Passphrase Priv Type Priv Passphrase Engine ID Auth S
139. anager programs may require the MIB files to be named something other than the current name for the files The MIB file names Global and Time and Frequency may be changed or edited as necessary to meet the requirements of the SNMP Manager Refer to the SNMP Manager documentation for more information on these requirements NetClock Instruction Manual 3 47 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 3 4 6 Configuring Alarms An alarm is asserted when predefined error conditions exist AND the associated alarm has been enabled Through the System Alarm screen Figure 3 48 the user may define what conditions constitute Major and Minor alarm conditions These are the only user defined NetClock Alarms Clicking the check box to the left of a particular user defined alarm will enable that alarm condition Each alarm condition may be set to exist for a specified duration before activating the alarm This is done by filling in the Timeout fields directly beneath the alarm condition 4 Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer lol x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help A Address la http 10 10 2 102 cgi bin main cgi E co S v D SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations Major Alarm Condition I Tracking fewer than A Satellites Timeout D Das 0 Hours 0 Minutes bo Seconds Minor Alarm Condition I Tracking fewer than 1 7 Satellites Timeout o Days a Hours fo Minutes a S
140. ar month day time with time zone and DST corrections time difference from UTC Standard time DST indicator leap second indicator and on time marker Format 3 data structure is shown below FFFFI YYYYMMDD HHMMSS HHMMD L CR LF where FFFF Format Identifier 0003 Time Sync Status Space A Space separator YYYY Year 1999 2000 2001 etc MM Month Number 01 12 Day of the Month 01 31 Hours 00 23 MM Minutes 00 59 SS Seconds 00 60 UO w ou Positive or Negative UTC offset Time Difference from UTC HHMM UTC Time Difference Hours Minutes 00 00 23 00 D Daylight Saving Time Indicator S 1 D O L Leap Second Indicator space L oul On time point CR Carriage Return LF Line Feed The time synchronization status character is defined as Space Whenever the front panel time synchronization lamp is green When the receiver is unable to track any satellites and the time synchronization lamp is red k When the receiver time is derived from the battery backed clock or set manually through the Setup Port Interface The time difference from UTC HHMM is selected when the Serial Comm or Remote port is configured A time difference of 0500 represents Eastern Time UTC is represented by 0000 The Daylight Saving Time indicator D is defined as During periods of standard time for the selected DST schedule During the 24 hour period preceding the change into DST
141. ate file opt upgrade temp fasok 29998 asok 310a1 tar bz2 Mar 6 13 12 51 Vile2 update System rebooting to complete update InTPIinterface System RelayfSecurty status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us Figure 3 104 Update Log Screen The Update Log Figure 3 104 is a running list of software updates performed on the NetClock Software updates are performed using a utility program provided by Spectracom NetClock Instruction Manual 3 123 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation A Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer _ loj x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Address la http 10 10 2 102 cqi bin main cgi E co E 7 O SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations GPS Signal Status Tracking 10 Satellites GPS Status Position Hold Antenna Sense UC Latitude N 43 3 50 862 Longitude W 77 38 43 028 Antenna height 180 meters Quality PASSED CHANNEL VID STRENGTH 1 7 42 2 6 39 3 21 43 4 29 44 5 9 43 6 26 46 7 22 43 8 18 44 gt Interface Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us Me OTT etre Figure 3 105 GPS Signal Status Screen The GPS Signal Status screen Figure 3 105 provides insight into the GPS receiver s operation and the signal quality from the satellites
142. ated Error Rates Time to reach 2 ms Rb Option 04 0 18 microseconds hour nominal 463 days OCXO Option 05 72 microseconds hour nominal 28 hours TCXO Standard 1 0 milliseconds hour nominal 2 hours typical TCXO Standard 7 2 milliseconds hour worst case 17 minutes NetClock Instruction Manual 7 19 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 7 3 Option 05 OCXO Oscillator Option 05 provides the NetClock with a self calibrating ovenized quartz oscillator The purpose of this oscillator is to provide a very accurate time base when GPS is either lost or cannot be obtained due to site limitations and a very precise 10 MHz output Because of its high degree of stability this oscillator provides the ability to greatly extend the hold over period when GPS is not present Extending the hold over period allows the unit to provide very accurate and useable time stamps and a 10 MHz output for a longer period of time once time synchronization has been lost The OCXO characteristics are not quite the same as the Option 04 Rubidium oscillator but are still much greater than the standard TCXO that is used in the product when option 4 and 5 are not installed NOTE The NetClock must be ordered with Option 05 installed at the time of the initial purchase This option cannot be added after the NetClock has been shipped from the factory 7 3 1 Comparison of the OCXO to the Rubidium and Standard TCXO oscillators 10 MHZ frequency outp
143. be used with any of the remote serial IRIG interfaces event timers or front panel displays 3 52 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series Once defined these local clocks can be used by any interface and will cause that interface to be automatically updated for its time zone and Daylight Saving Time DST conditions To configure a local clock perform the following steps NOTE The local clock is not available from the front panel Ethernet output per the NTP specifications NTP ALWAYS provides UTC time Each client on the network must handle corrections for local time OSO erne ore a o x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Address lai http 10 10 2 102 cgi bin main cgi E co E 7 O SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations Local Clock Name TIME ZONE SETUP Automatically configure to unit s physical locality Manually defined UTC offset UTC 00 00 x DST SETUP No DST rule always standard time Automatically configure to unit s physical locality Manually defined by region x Manually defined by week and day DST In Date InTPfinterface System RelayfSecurty status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us Figure 3 52 Local System Clock Screen 2 of 3 NetClock Instruction Manual 3 53 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation z osoft Interne or
144. bers for extended distance cables These cables are specifically designed for RS 422 or RS 485 applications they have a braided copper shield nominal impedance of 120 ohms and a capacitance of 12 to 16 picofarads per foot RS 485 cable may be purchased from Spectracom Specify part number CW04xxx where xxx equals the length in feet MANUFACTURER PART NUMBER Belden Wire and Cable Company 9841 1 800 BELDEN 1 Carol Cable Company 606 572 8000 C0841 National Wire and Cable Corp 232 225 5611 D 210 1 Table 2 3 Cable Sources for RS 485 Lines Over 1500 Feet NetClock Instruction Manual 2 13 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation For cable runs less than 1500 feet a lower cost twisted pair cable may be used Refer to Table 2 4 for possible sources In addition Category 5 cables may be used for cable runs less than 1500 feet MANUFACTURER PART NUMBER Alpha Wire Corporation 5471 1 800 52ALPHA Belden Wire and Cable Company 9501 1 800 BELDEN 1 Carol Cable Company 606 572 8000 C0600 Table 2 4 Cable Sources for RS 485 Lines Under 1500 Feet 2 8 5 Connection Method The RS 485 transmission line must be connected in a daisy chain configuration as shown in Figure 2 8 In a daisy chain configuration the transmission line connects from one RS 485 receiver to the next The transmission line appears as one continuous line to the RS 485 driver A branched or star configuration is not recommended This method of connection appears a
145. booting now Please reconnect in a little while M A SE E E ET Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Done 10 10 128 38 9 Figure 3 16 System Reboot Halt Screen 2 of 3 EE File Edit view Go Bookmarks Tools Help t E D B OD A O htps 0 10 128 38gbinman cgi ez amp Getting Started E Latest Headlines You have logged in as admin Halt now Please wait at least 30 seconds before removing power Interface System Relay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Done 10 10 128 38 Figure 3 17 System Reboot Halt Screen 3 of 3 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 3 3 2 Issuing the HALT Command through the CLI From the CLI Figure 3 18 enter halt Figure 3 19 Entering reboot will reboot the system Figure 3 20 NOTE Wait 30 seconds after entering the HALT command before removing power Window Help Linux 2 6 15 USAGI lt Spectracom gt lt i gt Spectracom login admin Password Welcome to the Spectracom Command Line Interface Cc gt Copyright Spectracom Corporation 2006 admin 16 16 128 38 gt help Command line interface CCLI gt help Type help cmd for a detailed help on the cmd command The following are the available commands time time reboot reboot halt halt log log COMMAND OBJECT HANDLE 1 option option COMMAND OPTION PRODUCT VALUE lt
146. button on the face of the NetClock There are two zeroize modes Zeroize SA A S Keys Only and Emergency Zeroize e Selecting Zeroize SA A S Keys Only or pressing the button on the face of the unit erases the crypto variable keys loaded in the SAASM receiver e Selecting Emergency Zeroize erases all operational data on the SAASM receiver 7 24 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series Main Menu Windows Internet Bius E loj x Eile Edit View Favorites Tools Help Google Gro 16159131 jopo E ey somris gt sotingse 7 w we Main Menu N A ab beag s Gob y by G 3B OF SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations SAASM GPS Operational Mode Standard Continuous Stationary Averaging SAASM GPS Receiver Zeroization D Zeroize SAASM GPS Receiver Zeroize SAVA S Keys Only C Emergency Zeroize Submit _Reset ETERS BEET REE BESTT SET Copyright 2006 Spectrscom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us bre SS ert gt Figure 7 15 Zeroize Screen 7 5 4 Security SAASM The SAASM screen found through the Security menu lists for the user the software and hardware version information It also includes the status of the system security keys NetClock Instruction Manual 7 25 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 7 6 Option 10 Low Phase Noise Rubidium 10 MHz and Differential IRIG Output Option 10 provides a low Phase Noise 1
147. c ltc COMMAND INDEX NAME net net COMMAND Arguments sys sys COMMAND Arguments ser ser COMMAND SERIAL Arguments rem rem COMMAND REMOTE Arguments irig irig COMMAND ARG fr frq COMMAND INDEX Arguments admin 1 16 128 38 gt ae Aare a i Figure 3 18 Command Line Interface CLI admin 16 16 128 38 gt help Command line interface CCLI gt help Type help cmd for a detailed help on the cmd command The following are the available commands time time reboot halt log option ltc net sys ser alt log COMMAND OBJECT HANDLE 1 option COMMAND OPTION PRODUCT VALUE ltc COMMAND INDEX NAME net COMMAND Arguments sys COMMAND Arguments ser COMMAND SERIAL Arguments rem rem COMMAND REMOTE Arguments irig irig COMMAND ARG frq frq COMMAND INDEX Arguments admin 1 16 128 38 gt admin 16 16 128 38 gt halt Broadcast message from root Mon Nov 26 16 31 62 2007 system is going down for system halt NOW halt admin 1 1 128 38 gt Figure 3 19 Halting the System from the CLI NetClock Instruction Manual 3 15 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation w Tera Term 10 10 128 38 T zaxi File Edit Setup Control Window Help Command line interface CCLI help Type help cmd for a detailed help on the The following are the available commands time time reboot reboot halt halt log log COMMAND OBJECT HANDLE 1 option option COMMAND OPTION PRODUCT VA
148. cations This is a Minor alarm 3 4 7 Configuring GPS The System GPS screen Figure 3 49 allows the user to configure the GPS receiver to provide more accurate results and faster start up Provided the GPS antenna is properly connected however it is not necessary to change the factory default settings for the unit to receive and synchronize to GPS time ANTENNA CABLE DELAY By setting the correct antenna cable delay the on time point is offset by the delay value to compensate for the antenna and in line amplifier delays Under typical conditions the expected cable and amplifier delays are negligible You can calculate the delay based on the manufacture s specifications The range of the cable delay is 50 000 000 nanoseconds The default value is 0 nanoseconds and the resolution is 1 nanosecond The following formula is used to calculate the cable delay D L C V Where D Cable delay in nanoseconds L Cable length in feet C Constant derived from velocity of light 1 016 V Nominal velocity of propagation expressed as decimal i e 66 0 66 Value is provided by cable manufacturer NOTE The antenna cable delay is nominal and beyond the accuracy specifications of the GPS receiver It is not normally necessary to set the antenna cable delay NetClock Instruction Manual 3 49 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation You can read the current location of the unit calculated by the GPS receiver without logging in The GPS receiver
149. ce CLI in the terminal program to configure initial values and determine the NetClock s network address 3 2 1 Using HyperTerminal to Connect to the NetClock Microsoft s HyperTerminal program is typically located under Accessories Communications in the Windows PC Start Menu Most terminal programs can be used to connect to the NetClock it is not necessary to use HyperTerminal specifically Establish a new connection using the serial port to which you have connected the NetClock typically COM1 Connection Description 2 xi 5 New Connection Enter a name and choose an icon for the connection Name Figure 3 5 Establishing a New Terminal Connection NetClock Instruction Manual 3 5 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 2 x DB commi Enter details for the phone number that you want to dial Country region United States 1 Area code 585 Phone number Connect using z Cancel Figure 3 6 Connecting to the Computer s Serial Port Configure the COM1 properties as shown in Figure 3 7 Bits per second should be 9600 Data bits should be 8 Parity should be none Stop bits should be 1 Flow control should be none When the connection is established in the terminal window the command line prompt will appear Figure 3 8 COM1 Properties mixi Port Settings Bits per second jso l Data bits ebo H Parity Noe l Stop bits hooo H Restore Defaults Elow control Can
150. ce appear in supporting documentation and that the name University of Delaware not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission The University of Delaware makes no representations about the suitability this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty JO IOI ISI IOI IOI IOI ICSI ITO III IOI IOI IOI IOI IOI IO III IO III IOI IOI IOI IOI I The following individuals contributed in part to the Network Time Protocol Distribution Version 4 and are acknowledged as authors of this work 1 1 Mark Andrews lt marka syd dms csiro au gt Leitch atomic clock controller 2 2 Bernd Altmeier lt altmeier atlsoft de gt hopf Elektronik serial line and PCI bus devices 3 3 Viraj Bais lt vbais mailmanl intel com gt and 4 Clayton Kirkwood lt kirkwood striderfm intel com gt port to WindowsNT 3 5 4 5 Michael Barone lt michael barone lmco com gt GPSVME fixes 5 6 Karl Berry lt karl owl HQ ileaf com gt syslog to file option 6 7 Greg Brackley lt greg brackley bigfoot com gt Major rework of WINNT port Clean up recvbuf and iosignal code into separate modules 7 8 Marc Brett lt Marc Brett westgeo com gt Magnavox GPS clock driver 8 9 Piete Brooks lt Piete Brooks cl cam ac uk gt MSF clock driver Trimble PARSE support 9 10 Reg Clemens lt reg dwf com gt Oncore driver Current maint
151. cel Apply Figure 3 7 Configuring the Serial Port Connection Properties 3 6 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series W Tera Term Web 3 1 COM1 VT Of x File Edit Setup Web Control Window Help mpectracom 9200 9300 Series Version 3 4 2 testunit login admin Password elcome to the Spectracom Command Line Interface c Copyright Spectracom Corporation 2006 admin 10 10 128 40 gt E Figure 3 8 Spectracom NetClock Command Line Interface CLI Log in as an administrator using the name admin and the password admin123 Login names and passwords are case sensitive A successful login will return the prompt admin x x x x where x x x x is the IP address of the NetClock Typing help in the Command Line Interface CLI will display a list of available commands Figure 3 9 Typing net will display the CLI net commands The command net config will walk the user through initial configuration W Tera Term Web 3 1 COM1 VT yx File Edit Setup Web Control Window Help Password elcome to the Spectracom Command Line Interface c Copyright Spectracom Corporation 2006 admin 10 10 126 40 gt help Command line interface CLI help ype help cmd for a detailed help on the cmd command he following are the available commands time time reboot reboot halt halt lag log COMMAND OBJECT HANDLE option option COMMAND OPTION PRODUCT VALUE ltc lte COMMAND INDEX NAME
152. ck Mounting To rack mount the unit locate the rack mount ears Using the rack mounting screws provided in the ancillary kit refer to 2 1 Inventory mount the ears to the sides of the unit If the NetClock is to be mounted flush with the front of the rack mount the ears to the front of the unit Slide the unit into the rack and connect the ears to the rack using appropriate screws not provided 2 6 GPS Antenna Installation 2 6 1 Antenna Cable for Outdoor Antenna When using the Model 8225 GPS outdoor antenna Spectracom recommends using LMR 400 low loss type cable for the GPS antenna cable To simplify the installation process Spectracom offers GPS cable assemblies terminated with Type N Male connectors Standard lengths are 10 25 50 100 150 and 200 feet If the antenna cable is purchased locally select coax suitable for outdoor use Consider the cable s weather ability temperature range UV resistance and attenuation characteristics Do not allow the antenna cable to be placed in standing water as water may permeate through the coax jacket over time On flat roof installations the coax can be suspended by cable hangers or placed in sealed PVC conduit Apply a weather proofing sealant or tape over all outdoor connections Installation of a surge protection device in the antenna line is recommended to protect the NetClock receiver and connected devices from lightning damage Spectracom offers the Model 8226 Impulse Suppressor t
153. config Set the prompted values to complete initial network setup In this manual the convention lt enter gt is used to indicate pressing the enter key comm1 HyperTerminal BETES Eile Edit View Call Transfer Help Welcome to the Spec c Copyright Spectr admin 1 2 128 14 gt The net group of USAGE net COMMAND COMMAND config show daytime time ssh admin 1 2 128 14 gt tracom Command Line Interface acom Corporation 2006 net commands are used to manage network interface Arguments Configure IP settings Displays network configurations Enable disable Daytime Enable disable UNIX time Enable disable Telnet Enable disable FIP Enable disable HTTP Enable disable secure HTTP Enable disable SSH Connected 0 01 12 Auto detect eoos N 1 SCROLL CAPS Num Capture Print echo Figure 3 11 Net Commands comm1 HyperTerminal loj x File Edit View Call Transfer Help The net group of USAGE net COMMAND COMMAND config show daytime time telnet ftp http https ssh admin 10 2 128 14 gt Current hostname commands are used to manage network interface Arguments Configure IP settings Displays network configurations Enable disable Daytime Enable disable UNIX time Enable disable Telnet Enable disable FIP Enable disable HTTP Enable disable secure HTTP Enable disable SSH net config Spectracom Enter new hostname
154. continuous once per second output Connector DB9 female pin assignments conform to EIA TIA 574 standard data communication equipment DCE No flow control Character structure ASCIl 1 start 8 data 1 stop and no parity Accuracy Data stream on time marker within 100 microseconds of UTC on Sync in Data Formats 0 1 3 and 8 Data Formats 2 4 and 7 within 1 millisecond of UTC Configuration Baud rate and output Data Formats are selected using the web browser user interface Bit rate selections are 1200 2400 4800 and 9600 baud There are eight Data Format selections available 1 5 6 RS 485 Output Signal Selected time Data Format in RS 485 levels output once per second Connector Removable 3 position terminal block Supplied Character structure ASCIl 1 start 8 data 1 stop and no parity Accuracy Data stream on time marker within 100 microseconds of UTC on Sync in Data Formats 0 1 3 and 8 Data Formats 2 4 and 7 within 1 millisecond of UTC Configuration Baud rate and output Data Formats are selected using the web browser user interface Bit rate selections are 1200 2400 4800 and 9600 baud There are eight Data Format selections available 1 5 7 Relay Outputs Three separate outputs provided for either Programmable Event Timer Output or Major Minor Alarm indication Relay contacts NO NC and Common Contact rating 30 VDC 2 amps Connector 10 position 3 81 mm terminal block mate supplied
155. count screen Figure 3 77 the user may create and assign privileges to up to 16 local users Click Create New and Submit to create and assign privileges to users Figure 3 78 NetClock Instruction Manual 3 91 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Main Menu Mozilla Firefox i Sel x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help gt E gt S i O htps 10 10 2 103 cgi bin maincgi amp IG e coogle O SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations User Name Required Password Required Type Password Again Required Group None Read Write System status and logs C ce Cc Local system clocks C amp C User defined alarms C ce C Network information and settings amp C Security features SSL SSH etc e C NTP configuration and statistics C amp C NTP security configuration amp C SNMP configuration Cc ce C SNMP security configuration e C Modem dialout configuration C ce Relay configuration and status C amp C Oscillator monitoring and disciplining C e C a NTP interface System Reiay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Done 10 10 2103 amp 4 Figure 3 78 Security User Account Screen Assigning Privileges 3 92 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series
156. ct us Bwe isi itw s sSsSs srSCSidrSCCT internet 7 Figure 3 108 System Status Screen 2 of 2 None No Time Source has been found after startup GPS The GPS receiver is the Primary Time Source for the Models 9383 and 9189 Modem When Option 03 is installed the Modem maybe used as a Primary Time Source or Secondary backup Time Source to GPS for the 9300 Series 3 128 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series User The Time Source is the result of the user setting the time from the System Setup System Time web browser user interface page when no Time Source is present The Static System Information section of the System Status screen provides the software revisions the NetClock s Serial Number and the MAC address The System Test Results section contains the results of the internal tests that are run These test are not complete checks of the entire paths For example the Serial port may pass even though it has been damaged by a surge GPS Startup Self Test The GPS Startup Self Test will indicate the status of the antenna antenna cable and the GPS receiver at the time of power up only If the antenna cable was not connected shorted or open at the time of power up and or if there is a problem with the GPS receiver or antenna or both at the time of power up this test will indicate FAILED Antenna UC means the antenna was not connected and Antenna OC
157. ctor cable is also supplied with the Model 8227 to allow it to be installed after the Model 8226 surge suppressor The Model 8227 should always be installed after the surge suppressor to prevent lightning or surge damage to the preamp Refer to the Model 8227 Manual for proper installation NetClock Instruction Manual 29 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 2 7 Ethernet Network Cabling Spectracom NetClocks provide a 10 100 Ethernet port for full NTP functionality as well as full web browser user interface enabled configuration monitoring and diagnostic support The Ethernet port is provided on the front panel for easy connection to routers and hubs Use standard CAT 5 cable with RJ45 connectors When connecting to a hub or router use a straight through wired cable When connecting directly to a PC use a crossover wired cable 2 7 1 Optional CNC3000 Cable Kit Spectracom offers an available cable kit called the CNC3000 This kit consists of three cables 1 Six foot RS 232 Setup port cable DB9M to DB8F for initial configuration 1 Six foot Cat 5 crossover LAN cable for direct PC connection 1 Six foot Cat 5 patch LAN cable for LAN hub link Contact our Sales department if you would like to obtain the CNC3000 kit 2 10 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation Model 9300 Series 2 8 Remote Port and Serial Comm Port Output Pin outs and Wiring This section contains wiring and pin out information for the rear panel Remote R
158. d as well as user input Calibration calls happen upon a user request Time verification calls happen on a user specified interval if holdover is entered from time synchronization with another source Time synchronization calls occur when time synchronization is lost and on a user specified interval until another time source is available Modem test calls happen when no calls have been made for a user specified time or upon a user request Because the modem determines how to use a call after NetClock Instruction Manual 7 15 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation the call is finished it is possible to start a call as a certain call type and actually use it as another call type Here is a description of each of the four possible call types 7 1 7 1 Calibration Call Calibration calls are done to characterize the call latency A user specified number of calls will be made over the calibration period and the average latency will be used to adjust all future calls NOTE The calibration will only be done at the user s request and may be started only while in sync from a stratum 0 time source Calibration calls may be continued into holdover but will be cut off if the unit goes out of sync at any point during the calibration period 7 1 7 2 Time Verification Call Time verification calls are made to verify the unit still has acceptable time and to correct for any leap seconds that may be asserted while the reference is not available Calls will be
159. d can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required fo correct the interference at his own expense Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 3 1 3 2 3 2 1 Table of Contents THE 9300 SERIES NETCLOCK 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 1 1 Introduction aaea era tlie ae etl nad a ks A RA al Atta thas a 1 1 Inputs and Outputs What Can the NetClock Do for YOU ate Js Acne at Rie Ga tae ste 1 1 Front Panel nutounsitiige mdamieanniam inna nanan A a a 1 2 Front Panel GE DLN ie ate S s seracdss ancnaxaedeegs oaraarane canta stacauave nseseotatateasasastotaabtsdnam berlin ania tetaatmt hentai 1 2 PRONE Pane lie DS tatu Indications vaccecasce narosversaeascacsarhuesstecanss Castes candas levbashas dadiacedtanbustan sedvecs tasoutateciucasoarts 1 2 Rear ell ccliiaceaccute sae sseatacn dense aa a ete aaa a a 1 3 Warranty Information and Customer SUD DOT isnasuvsitacentscmaniiieten cain deal unr Wvimeld natn eile 1 4 Specifications enoni a ea tall toes tatters Mitel A alte Natalee 1 5 RQ COIME cath bsscedutas 2ica tel neni anua food sons ehdaras a A a Wale alan Novadabal ana wire rae mes 1 5 RS 232 Serial Setup Interface P Of sx wisi a cerns ise Aen ais ae ere aed nani 1 5 1000 Ethernet Pomena a an taeda
160. d the reason is indicated as shown below Reasons Not Found There is no modem connected the modem is incorrectly connected or it is not turned on Modem Error The modem gave a response indicating an unspecified problem The System Features and Options section provides the current status of all the features and options that are available for your particular NetClock Features that are currently turned on will indicate ENABLED Features that indicate DISABLED are not enabled However the disabled features may be enabled after the original purchase If an option which is enabled fails to correctly initialize and become ready to be used its status is ERROR Option 03 can be enabled in the field Options 04 and 05 must be purchased with the unit when it is initially ordered With the future purchase of the Modem option Option 03 we will provide NetClock Instruction Manual 3 129 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation a key hash that will enable the feature to be turned on Please contact our Sales department to purchase the option The purchase price of the modem option includes the cost for the modem as well as the key to enable the feature The modem selection is very limited in compatibility Not all available modems are compatible with the 9300 Series Must be configured as Hayes AT so we will supply you with a modem when the option is purchased If the modem option was not initially purchased contact
161. ddress DHCP must be disabled and the IP address must be changed to a static address once the NetClock is properly configured Failure to do this will result in a loss of time synchronization if the DHCP server assigns a new IP address to the NetClock Connect to 10 10 2 102 21x FA To access security area Username and Password Required User name a M Password J Remember my password cme Your login name is admin The password is admin123 Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer lolx File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Address http 10 10 2 102 egi bin main cgi M Bo o SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations InterfacefSystem Relay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us j Internet Figure 3 2 Web Browser User Interface Web UI 3 2 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series When you enter the NetClock IP address in your browser this will differ from the IP address shown in the examples within this manual you will be prompted to log in Figure 3 1 The default administrator account is set at the factory as admin The password is admin123 After entering the login name and password and successfully logging into the NetClock the user will see a Web UI screen similar to Figure 3 2 From this screen click the Security tab The Security
162. ded 3 106 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series You may choose to check either or both AH and ESP to set them as Require Use Default or Unique e Default means the kernel consults the system wide default for the protocol specified e Use means the kernel uses an SA if it is available while the kernel keeps normal operation otherwise e Require means an SA is required whenever the kernel sends a packet matched with the policy e Unique is the same as Require but allows the policy to match the unique outbound SA NetClock Instruction Manual 3 107 9300 3 4 22 7 Configuring IPSec Manual SA Series Spectracom Corporation To establish an IPSec connection between the NetClcok and an IPv6 addressed host B using manual SA configuration refer to the IPSec Manual SA Configuration screen Figure 3 90 3 4 22 7 1 Manual Security Associations Input the NetClock IP address as the Source IP and host B s IP address as the Destination IP Main Menu Mozilla Firefox lol x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help i gt S GF O https 10 10 2 109 cg bin main cgi S a gt Glz cooste e ITP interface systemRelay Security status amp Lod Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved srectpacom You have logged in as admin IPsec Security Association Configuration
163. e l5 x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ae Address http 10 10 2 102 cgi bin main cgi O SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations Week Day z Month z Hours Minutes DST Out Date Week A Day OA Month H Hours D Minutes i Change Amount Hours Minutes Manually defined by month and day DST In Date Day x Month x Hours Minutes DST Out Date Day x Month x Hours Minutes Change Amount Hours Minutes Submit Reset InTPIinterface system RelayfSecurty status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us ae ntermet Figure 3 53 Local System Clock Screen 3 of 3 Enter any name you wish for the Local Clock Name up to 20 characters long It can be any meaningful name that helps you know your point of reference example New York Wall Clock in Bldg27 Eastern HQ etc 3 54 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series TIME ZONE Under the TIME ZONE SETUP you will see two choices e Automatically configure to unit s physical locality e Manually defined UTC offset Automatically Configure to Unit s Physical Locality By selecting this option the unit will compute the Time Zone Offset automatically based on the location of the unit provided by GPS receiver If you select this feature before
164. e NetClock has two front panel displays that are independently programmable The left display is LCD 1 and the right display is LCD 2 You may use the Web UI to change the display and time format and to select or edit or create system clocks The display font may also be changed and includes a custom font named Mark When you make a change to the front panel display configuration and click Submit the change in the display is immediately visible on the front panel NOTE When selecting a system clock to display on one LCD of the front panel LCDs while displaying the date on the other LCD be sure to use the same system clock in both display If setting the time to local time change the date to local time as well Otherwise the new day time and the new date rollover may not coincide with each other NetClock Instruction Manual 3 41 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 4 Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer i O x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help a Q pack Mg 7 x E T JO Search Se Favorites Ol R a LJ Fol 33 Address http 10 10 2 102 cgi bin main cgi E co k Google CS C Search 2 S130 blocked Ff Check v AutoLink AutoFill Ea Options PE CT RA COM You have logged in as admin ynchronizing Critical Operations 10 MHz Outputs Current Frequency Output State 10 MHz Main Board Frequency Output ON Signature Control Mode None x No
165. e Offset or automatic DST rule will result in an error message CR LF lQYY DDD HH MM SS SSS LD where CR Carriage Return LF Line Feed Time Sync Status space Q Quality Indicator space A B C D YY Year without century 99 00 01 etc A Space separator DDD Day of Year 001 366 HH Hours 00 23 UTC time Colon separator MM Minutes 00 59 SS Seconds 00 60 Decimal Separator SSS Milliseconds 000 999 L Leap Second Indicator space L D Daylight Saving Time Indicator S 1 D O The leading edge of the first character CR marks the on time point of the data stream The time synchronization status character is defined as described below Space Whenever the front panel time synchronization lamp is green When the receiver is unable to track any satellites and the time synchronization lamp is red When the receiver time is derived from the battery backed clock or set manually through the Setup Port Interface The quality indicator Q provides an inaccuracy estimate of the output data stream When the receiver is unable to track any GPS satellites a timer is started Table 6 2 Table of Quality Indicators lists the quality indicators and the corresponding error estimates based upon the GPS receiver 1 PPS stability and the time elapsed tracking no satellites The Tracking Zero Satellites timer and the quality indicator reset when the receiver reacquires a satellite
166. econds Submit Reset MA SE E S SET Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us Internet Figure 3 48 System Alarm Screen User defined Alarm The user specified period of time allotted for operation while tracking less than a user specified number of satellites has expired This can be a Major and or Minor alarm Software Fault One or more software sub systems have experienced a major run time error This is a Major alarm 3 48 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series Time Sync Alarm The period of time allotted for operation without tracking sufficient qualified satellites has expired The factory default period is 2 hours This is a Major alarm GPS Receiver Fault The CPU cannot communicate with the GPS receiver This is a Major alarm Frequency Error Measured oscillator frequency error exceeds limits Table 3 5 This is a Major alarm Oscillator Option Frequency Limit TCXO Standard 6 6 x 10 OCXO Option 05 6 6 x 10 Rb Option 04 3 3x 10 Table 3 5 Oscillator Frequency Error Limits Power Failure The NetClock has lost power This is both a Major and a Minor alarm Antenna Problem The antenna sense circuitry warns when the antenna is not connected or a cable short or open is detected This is a Minor alarm Oscillator Adjust The oscillator requires an adjustment to maintain operation within specifi
167. ed upon the network utilization and time drift in the clients NTP broadcast can utilize MD5 authentication Select a single MD5 key to use for broadcast from the pull down menu Use of MD5 authentication requires that MD5 symmetrical keys already be defined on the NTP Symmetrical Keys page With the NTP service enabled and NTP broadcasting checked the NetClock will operate in both modes When the NTP service is enabled the NTP server will listen for NTP request messages from NTP clients on the network When an NTP request packet is received the NTP server will send an NTP response time packet to the requesting client Under typical conditions the Spectracom NTP server can service up to 4 000 NTP requests per second without MD5 authentication enabled and a somewhat lower rate with MD5 authentication enabled When NTP broadcasting is selected the NTP server will send unsolicited NTP time packets to the local broadcast address at a user selected rate The rates available are included in the dropdown menu The NTP clients can use unicast broadcast or a combination of both to discover and synchronize with the NTP server The NTP server supports authenticated NTP packets using an MD5 authenticator This feature does not encrypt the time packets but attaches an authenticator which consists of a key identifier and an MD5 message digest to the end of each packet This can be used to guarantee that NTP packets came from a valid NTP client or ser
168. el 8179T TimeTap RS 485 Interface Spectracom Model 9288 is an Ethernet Time Server that supports NTP and SNTP time protocols The Model 9288 accepts Format 0 Format 2 Format 7 or Format 8 Formats 7 and 8 are not available on all time sources Contact Tech Support for additional information and connects to the RS 485 data bus through a three position terminal block Connect the Model 9288 to the NetClock as shown in Figure 2 13 NETCLOCK Twisted Pair TO ETHERNET TIME REMOTE OUTPUT 7 SERVER TO OTHER RS 485 DEVICES GROUND 3 POSITION TERMINAL BLOCK Figure 2 13 Model 9288 RS 485 Interface The Model 8185 TimeBurst provides a digital time of day data burst to a radio transmitter The TimeBurst accepts Data Format 0 or 1 Connect the TimeBurst to the RS 485 data bus using a 3 position terminal block as shown in Figure 2 14 NetClock Instruction Manual 2 17 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation NETCLOCK TO TIMEBURST RS 485 REMOTE OUTPUT Twisted Pair fee TO OTHER RS 485 DEVICES GROUND 3 POSITION TERMINAL BLOCK Figure 2 14 TimeBurst RS 485 Interface 2 8 6 Termination A 120 Ohm termination resistor is required on devices located at the ends of the RS 485 transmission line Terminating the cable end preserves data integrity by preventing signal reflections For a one way bus installation Figure 2 8 terminate the last device on the bus The RS 485 data bus can be split in two directions as shown in Fig
169. elated to OpenSSL please contact openssl core openss1 org OpenSSL License Copyright c 1998 2003 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be ed to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org u 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www ope
170. esssesssssssesssessesssetesneeesnseeesnsetsnseensnsetenseseens 3 98 Figure 3 85 Security RADIUS General Screen Zicsdieccstccersistceccecalesnatisacestlitole elec cer KEANNA 3 99 Figure 3 86 Security RADIUS Client Configuration Screen cssecsessescessesstsseeetestesteseestescestesteetesnestesneatenateneeass 3 100 Figure 3 87 IPSEC IRE SA Configuration Screen 1of2 sets avis bates teatiwinmiuraadieianadanlatoueindlteite 3 102 Figure 3 88 IPSEC IKE SA Configuration Screen 2 Of 2 assess 3 103 Figure 3 89 IPSec General Screen sets satis ccs axsieczes cvachtegecdcadapincsthastegevinass Hencthctquinh jistnad shan Pai aint eeaaet 3 106 Figure 3 90 IPSec Manual SA Configuration 1 Of 2 ceessesessesseesesseesteseesteseestesnestesssnsestsnseaeenseatsnsetsnsetanseass 3 108 Figure 3 91 IPSec Manual SA Configuration 2 of 2 cc tala tse oceans sc eeteedecs causes ceshse seetaiean bod edbdcasactarteetetas titel 3 109 NetClock Instruction Manual vii 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Figure 3 92 IPSec General Screen sisiescactsccacisstecs aatseeceet eccedaeead eeidintinara lad olan a aed EEKAN a 3 110 Figure 3 93 Status and Log MGMUva pe stette ss cater tele erentaren its teeiaea toed cans cantante watae eters Regen aeaartieas 3 112 Figure 3 94 Alarm LOG SCEE Nanhi inna iai ki aiiis 3 113 Figure 3 95 Authorization Log gt CLEC sissts tava ttueictads tne eacedleatachd insets antatnal Netieendtialea maa ane aba ENEKE EE EEA EEEEa EEEE 3 114 P
171. et Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 10 10 2 102 cgi bin main cgi Synchronizing Critical Operations D SPFPECIRACOM You have logged in as admin SYSTEM CLOCK UTC x Click here to edit or create local systern clocks Submit Reset mA SE N N EET Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us Figure 3 68 Set Event Clock Screen 3 76 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series Relay function can be tested from the Test Relays screen Figure 3 69 Select one of the relays by clicking the radio button and test the selected relay by clicking Submit If the relays are not connected to external devices an audible clicking noise will emit from the NetClock This noise indicates the relays are responding to the test If external devices are connected to the relays testing a relay should cause the connected device to actuate When the test is complete the Web UI will display the message Relay number test complete z osoft Interne ore l0 x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay You have logged in as admin Relay to Test Relay 1 C Relay 2 Relay 3 Submit Reset MA SE E N SET Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us oone o STS ne Figure 3 69 Test Relays Screen NetClock Instruction Manual 3 77 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation
172. ettings NetClock Instruction Manual 3 43 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 3 4 4 Sysplex Timing The NetClock may be used as an external time source ETS to synchronize an IBM Sysplex Timer This is achieved by configuring Serial Port 1 refer to Configuring the Interface on the NetClock to the following settings Figure 3 44 Baud Rate 9600 Data Format 02 Request Char User defined T System Clock UTC Address https 10 10 50 20 cgi bin main cgi O SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations BAUD RATE 3600 DATA FORMAT 02 REQUEST CHAR Multicast Userdefined T _ SYSTEM CLOCK UTC x Click here to edit or create local system clocks Reset INTPIinterface Systemn Relay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us ea irene Figure 3 44 Configuring Serial Port 1 for Sysplex Timing 3 44 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series The Sysplex Timer must be configured to use Protocol 2 NetClock 2 and connected to the NetClock Serial Comm 1 port via a 9 pin serial cable not included Older Sysplex Timers 9037 001 may connect to an ETS through the Sysplex Timer s console port while later model Sysplex Timers 9037 002 feature a dedicated ETS port 3 4 5 Configuring the System SNMP Main Menu Mozilla Firefox i ml x File Edit View History Bookmarks
173. euIg ay pue sw 0 Z JO uonenp e aney SiayJeW XEpU pue 019Z Areurq y Papoa ypp m esind ere owed auy y BuNp pejueseid SUONOUNY 01 U09 BU pue SpJOM BPOd OUN OM AUL juaweje Buipeesons au jo efipe Huipee y 0 19491 pue awy UO Sdd O e4ojeq sw 0 4ND90 UONeINp sw 0 8 g td gq SsaynUap UONIsod sdd 0 apoo eu Bulpeecons y 10 JUIOd 9u 1 4 1 UO ay S y juawaj sw o g puos s aul jo eBpe u pe j y d pue y syu waj sw o g AYNI SUOI om Aq payuep s ewes awl puodes 0 yore jo BuluulBeq ayy ayjoads Yv3A 40 IWIL Q98 SAva SYNOH SALANIIN SGNO93S I 1 I 1 I l I liau 002 0p 9 oltre op s 0e 9 BZ SEBS eano Bs aana l sss cans s88 vanaf 6d 8d ld 9d Sd vd td td Id Ud 0d S661 9bz Aeg paziuosyouAs awn 4 9L 9E 9b 21 pazjuouyouhs you 0 See venue eee SI LNIOd SIHL LY AWIL SNLYLS ONAS INIL 8 sesu G saeu g sasu 0 SANOJASITIN NI 3WIL AWIL NO gt 006 008 002 009 oos 00t oot ooz oor 0 06 08 0z 09 os or oe oz oL 0 ANNOOS X3QNI GNOOAS SAWVYS INIL AWIL g Sldl 3 35 ion Code descripti IRIG B Time Figure 3 39 NetClock Instruction Manual 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation The IRIG B code contains the Binary Coded Decimal BCD time of year Control Function CF field and the Straight Binary Seconds time of day The following figure illustrates the IRIG B data structure The BCD time of year provides the day of the year 1 366 and the
174. every hour at the minute second and millisecond that is specified within 100 milliseconds Daily The event will happen every day at the hour minute second and millisecond specified within 100 milliseconds Weekly The event will happen every week at the weekday hour minute second and millisecond specified within 100 milliseconds Monthly The event will happen every month at the day of month hour minute second and millisecond specified within 100 milliseconds If the day is set to be a day that isn t in short months the event will happen on the last day of the short months Yearly The event will happen every year at the month day of month hour minute second and millisecond specified within 100 milliseconds If the month and day of month are programmed for February 29th this can only be done while currently in a leap year the event will happen on March 1 on non leap years and February 29th on leap years NOTE The Current Event Schedule Figure 3 66 is a list of ENABLE events only The events are ordered by next occurrence NetClock Instruction Manual 3 73 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Aicrosoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 10 10 2 102 cgi bin main cgi D SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations Next events as of 18 38 06 on Apr 24 2006 UTC time Current Relay States Relay 1 is OFF Relay
175. external in the OpenSSL library 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation RC4 support has been replaced with ARC4 support from OpenSSL Blowfish is now external in the OpenSSL library The licence continues Note that any information and cryptographic algorithms used in this software are publicly available on the Internet and at any major bookstore scientific library and patent office worldwide More information can be found e g at http www cs hut fi crypto The legal status of this program is some combination of all these permissions and restrictions Use only at your own responsibility You will be responsible for any legal consequences yourself I am not making any claims whether possessing or using this is legal or not in your country and I am not taking any responsibility on your behalf NO WARRANTY BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIR
176. external time reference is detected the time and date will be changed automatically to the reference values The manually set values will be overwritten When this occurs a log entry will be made in the Operational log indicating the amount of correction that was made from the manually set time This log then shows if the time was ever manually set and then corrected by another external reference Manually setting the time while synchronizing to the Option 03 modem will cause loss of time synchronization automatically triggering a dial out call to attempt resynchronization Manually setting the time while synchronizing to GPS will immediately set the time to the GPS reference Choosing Create New from the Local System Clocks screen Figure 3 51 allows the user to define up to five local times times other than UTC or GPS to display using the NetClock Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer loj x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Address E htip 10 10 2 102 tgi bin main cgi Bco E z D S PECTRACOM You have logged in as admin rchronizing Critical Operations Create or edit one of the 5 possible local system clocks Local System Clock Create New x submit delete NTP interface SET EA E EET Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us Figure 3 51 Local System Clock Screen 1 of 3 You can define up to five local clocks or time zones to
177. ference between UTC and GPS time Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer loj x Eile Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address https 10 10 2 103 cgi bin main cgi 3 co a You have logged in as admin lf the NetClock is currently receiving valid time from a reference source ie GPS IRIG Serial Time Code etc any date time information configured using this page will be overwritten Note Date time information configured using this page is considered to be UTC System Time Set System Time using user specified UTC time below Date 74 Sep 2006 Time 3 p0 i fia Leap Seconds Number of leap seconds between UTC and GPS time 14 Submit Reset Intl interface System Relay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Figure 3 50 System Time Screen When manually setting the time of the NetClock the time is entered as UTC not as your local time This means the time is not corrected for either Local Time or DST correction Entering your local time will cause an error of several hours in the NetClock outputs The amount of error will depend on which Time Zone you are located and whether that Time Zone observers DST NetClock Instruction Manual 3 51 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation NOTE NOTE Manually setting the time of the NetClock is not recommended unless no external reference is available to the network When an
178. fic code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence Part 1 CMU UCD copyright notice BSD like Copyright 1989 1991 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University Derivative Work 1996 1998 2000 Copyright 1996 1998 2000 The Regents of the University of California All Rights Reserved Permission
179. fined keys Daytime Protocol Disabled Disabled Web User Interface Time Protocol Disabled Disabled Web User Interface Command Line Interface Available Console Port Unless dial out modem connected Available Not Applicable uses this port Web User Interface Disabled Use SSH instead SSH Enabled default keys provided Enabled Web User Interface File Transfer Disabled Enabieg Use SFTP or SCP Available Available Not Applicable Available Available Not Applicable We recommend secure clients use only SNMPv3 with authentication for secure installations Web User Interface Telnet Enabled Web User Interface Table 3 2 Default and Recommended Configurations 3 12 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 3 3 Issuing the HALT Command before Removing Power Once power is applied to the NetClock it should not be removed unless the HALT command is issued to the unit This prevents corruption of the NetClock file system CAUTION Once power is applied to the unit DO NOT disconnect power unless the HALT command is first issued to the NetClock To be absolutely certain that it is safe to remove power wait 30 seconds after the HALT command is issued before removing power NOTE The HALT command may be issued to the NetClock through the Web UI through the CLI or through SNMP To restore your NetClock to Factory Defaults while halting rebooting refer
180. fo Years B Days fiz Hours s Minutes Error bounds Min 0 Milliseconds 18 Microseconds Max 3153 Milliseconds 600 Microseconds Set By Error fe Milliseconds E Microseconds Time in Holdover Not In Holdover Submit Reset Interface System Relay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us F of 7 TU i Ai Figure 3 57 System Holdover Screen Limits on the minimum and maximum length of allowable holdover have been placed on each oscillator as shown below in Table 3 7 Oscillator Minimum Length Maximum Length TCXO 15 minutes 24 hours OCXO Option 05 15 minutes 30 days Rb Option 04 15 minutes 730 days 2 years Table 3 7 Minimum and Maximum Allowable Holdover Values If the user sets the length below or above the limits or if the error is too small or large the NetClock will notify the user that this setting is outside its allowable parameters NetClock Instruction Manual 3 63 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation If the unit is currently in sync the changes will take effect immediately If the unit is in holdover the changes will not take effect until the next holdover To force the changes to take effect immediately reboot the NetClock Time in Holdover displays either the amount of time that the NetClock has been in the holdover mode or displays a phrase that the unit is not currently in the holdover mode If the unit i
181. g menu groups the NetClock s status and log access screens From this menu the user can view system logs and monitor that status of the NetClock s GPS signal The user may also view system and NTP statuses from this menu NOTE The times indicated in all log entries are UTC no correction for local time or Daylight Saving Time Four iterations of each log are kept locally on the NetClock with the oldest rotated out deleted as a fifth log is generated Logs can be up to 75K in size individually This means that 300K of storage is devoted to each log NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer BEG File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Address http 10 10 2 102 cgi bin main cgi z Synchronizing Critical Operations D SPECIRACOM You have logged in as admin Alarm Log Mar 16 21 38 13 Spectracom spectracom system STATUS CHANGE Mar 16 21 38 13 Spectracom spectracom system ACTIVE ALARMS MAJOR Mar 16 21 38 13 Spectracom spectracom system Frequency Error Mar 16 21 38 13 Spectracom spectracom system STATUS CHANGE Mar 16 21 38 13 Spectracom spectracom system ACTIVE ALARMS MAJOR Mar 16 21 38 13 Spectracom spectracom systern Time Sync Alarm Mar 16 21 38 13 Spectracom spectracom system Frequency Error Mar 16 21 38 14 Spectracom spectracom system STATUS CHANGE Mar 16 21 38 14 Spectracom spectracom system ACTIVE ALARMS
182. h 9 the following procedure will change the Data Format 1 structure to provide this Connect to the Serial Setup Interface port with a PC running HyperTerminal OR telnet into the NetClock using the IP address of the unit To change Data Format 1 output on a Serial port to a leading 0 type ser mod ser 1 2 1 zero lt enter gt Where 1 or 2 is the desired Serial port number To change Data Format 1 output on a Remote RS 485 port to a leading 0 type rem mod rem 1 2 1 zero lt enter gt Where 1 or 2 is the desired Remote port number To change Data Format 1 output on a Serial port back to a leading space type Ser mod ser 1 2 none lt enter gt Where 1 or 2 is the desired Remote port number To change Data Format 1 output on a Remote RS 485 back to a leading space type rem mod rem 1 2 none lt enter gt Where 1 or 2 is the desired Remote port number NetClock Instruction Manual 5 3 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 5 3 Format 2 This format provides a time data stream with millisecond resolution The Format 2 data stream consists of indicators for time synchronization status time quality leap second and Daylight Saving Time Time data reflects UTC time and is in the 24 hour format Format 2 data structure is shown below NOTE Format 2 cannot be configured for a Time Zone Offset or with automatic Daylight Saving Time adjustment Attempting to configure a Local clock using Data Format 2 with either a Time Zon
183. he modem can be configured as either the primary reference or a secondary back up reference In the Secondary Back up mode of operation all GPS antenna problem alarms indicating a short or open in the antenna cable and SNMP traps associated with the GPS reference input will be fully enabled By contrast when Primary Time Source is selected the antenna problem alarm and associated SNMP traps for the antenna will not be generated No indication of a problem with the GPS cable will be present or available The Client mode of operation does not affect the ability to receive GPS NOTE lf a unit initially operates without a GPS reference and primary mode of operation is selected and a GPS antenna is later connected the mode of operation should be changed to Secondary Time Source This enables the GPS antenna problem alarms which can be used in troubleshooting the system 7 4 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series Baud rate Baud rates of 1200 and 9600 are available and can be selected from the pull down menu Modem speaker Toggles the modem speaker on or off during dial out Dialout now Only available in Client mode and only when the unit is not in time sync Checking this box and clicking submit will prompt the dial out modem software to attempt an immediate dial out procedure with the current settings if the unit is currently out of sync When a unit is configured in client mode while it is in time sync the D
184. he unit the status of the major and minor alarms the current time synchronization status and the current external reference identifier Time Source The time source field contains the current source for time input The possible inputs are as follows NetClock Instruction Manual 3 127 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 10 10 2 102 cgi bin main cgi You have logged in as admin System Test Results a PCB Test PASSED PCB rev 0 PCC Test PASSED PCC rev 3 CSL Test PASSED CSL rev 5 RTC Test PASSED GPS Startup Self Test FAILED Antenna UC GPS Antenna Sense FAILED Antenna UC Temp Sensor PASSED IRIG Test PASSED 9 02 Serial Port 1 PASSED 2 03 Serial Port 2 PASSED 2 03 Remote Port 1 PASSED 2 03 Remote Port 2 PASSED 2 03 Front Panel LCD 1 PASSED Front Panel LCD 2 PASSED System Features and Options Security ENABLED Serial Port 1 ENABLED Serial Port 2 ENABLED Remote Port 1 ENABLED Remote Port 2 ENABLED IRIG Output ENABLED Front Panel Display ENABLED Relays ENABLED Oscillator Disciplining ENABLED 10 MHZ Frequency Output ENABLED TCXO Oscillator ENABLED Trimble Resolution T GPS ENABLED a Interface SystemJRelay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Conta
185. he user must configure the network input to be received by the Model 9388 Obtain the source output settings from your network administrator and enter the baud rate and Data Format The year must be entered for Data Format 0 Click the Submit button when all values have been entered NOTE For 9388 units ONLY the DATA FORMAT must be set to match the NetClock s remote output data format If these values do not match the 9388 cannot synchronize By factory default NetClock non 9388 time server units output Data Format 00 while the 9388 is factory configured to receive Data Format 02 Spectracom recommends using Data Format 02 meaning the Data Format value in the NetClock must be changed from the factory default to match the factory default of the 9388 NetClock Instruction Manual 3 65 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 4 Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 10 10 2 100 cgi bin main cgi D SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations The Serial Time Code Setup configures the expected input that this unit will receive from an external source You must know what the source output settings are before proceeding BAUD RATE 3600 x DATA FORMAT o2 For data format 00 please enter year 2006 of the current local time based on the reference time code you use If you select any other data format the input from
186. hone at US 1 585 321 5800 3 4 3 Configuring the Interface The Interface menu Figure 3 34 groups the NetClock s Interface configuration functions From this menu the user may access the Interface Serial Port Remote Port IRIG Display and Frequency Output screens The user may also use this menu to set the interface configuration to the factory default settings F Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer o x Eile Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Address lai http 10 10 2 102 cgi bin main cgi Go he x O SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations INTPI interface SystemJRelay Security status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us Done Internet Ui Figure 3 34 Interface Menu The NetClock has two serial ports RS 232 ports and two remote output ports RS 485 ports that support independent output of date time stamps from the NetClock From the respective screens for the serial and remote ports Figure 3 35 and Figure 3 36 the user may define the baud rate and the Data Format for each port The system clock may also be selected if a local clock set for a local time zone has been defined Serial ports include the Request Char feature which allows the user to choose between multicast broadcasting once per second on the second through the port and a user defined character When the character of the user
187. iJ vbR1VeAqo88 LpAHaxFqdU9V34rfirlJvi gROVBATgnp4 9eZKaj HAUAX ObY yxOSaj 21ITOzAsc CNn1i sHp6S DFzmMIoFubvxcLAw8wBHN39605T 7DqOOkpVS Xj 2dnt4uV I0Ak Azux9IACwVcaibcfdvAgN PLg8 Update x509 PEM Certificate File via Web Interface I Update Certificate Update Certificate by external File Transfer Caution You must indicate certificate type by filename If you convert an invalid certificate type you may lose HTTPS access You can enable HTTP access via the commmand line I Update Certificate from uploaded file cert pem x509 PEM z Submit Reset gt INTPJinterface System Relay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Done 10 10 2101 amp Figure 3 76 Security HTTPS Screen 2 of 2 3 88 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series NOTE When generating a certificate select Apache when prompted for information on the Web servers software This should result in the preferred x509 PEM certificate format The Common Name field is the name of the host being authenticated The Common Name field in the x509 certificate must match the hostname IP address or URL used to reach the host via HTTPS This field should be filled with the hostname or IP address of the NetClock Spectracom recommends using a static IP address because DHCP generated IP addresses can change If the hostname or IP address changes the x509 certificate must be rege
188. ia 2 DST rules Added note concerning IRIG Input Year and Serial Time Code Year requiring restart on change Added Serial Time Code Setup section which applies to 9388 models only Added note concerning IRIG Input Year and Serial Time Code Year requiring restart on change Added note regarding restarting modem if passwords change and when switching between Client and Console modes Changed System GPS Screen cable delay change Added IRIG code descriptions Corrected RS 485 port pin out depiction Clarified data format matching issue when using 9388 units Class B Digital Device changed to Class A Digital Device as FCC notification Modified note in installation summary concerning NTP synchronization Added a note to the Oscillator log page concerning FREQ ERROR notation Add the IRIG codes for IRIG Input Verified specifications stated in Option 06 Added Option 11 Updated HyperTerminal references screenshots in initial setup Changed modem section to reflect upgrade to modem cable adapter included and change of modem with DIP switch settings The current revision level of the manual remains E changes made concurrently with previous ECN Added Option 10 Added instructions for restoring factory default settings and deleting position data Clarified requirement for modem test and calibration calls in Modem section stratum 0 sync required Added stc CLI commands Modified HTTPS and NTP configura
189. ialout now checkbox will be greyed out disabled 7 1 4 ACTS Server Mode The ACTS Server feature has been designed to operate similarly to the Automated Computer Time Service ACTS provided by the National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST It is compatible with client programs that dial out to the NIST ACTS service for time synchronization such as the NetClock when configured in Client mode For best accuracy Spectracom recommends using a NetClock in Client mode in conjunction with a NetClock operating in ACTS Server mode OSO erne ore 3 loj x Eile Edit View Favorites Tools Help a adgas Address E https 10 10 50 20 cg bin main cgi You have logged in as admin System time is significantly less accurate when time is obtained from Modem Dial Out E The Command Line Interface console on the Serial Setup Port will be inaccessible while in client or server mode All other modem options will be disabled when in console mode Port Mode ACTS Server Mode z Time Service Abbreviation Erec DUT1 Value p Leap Second None E Month E Year z006 Daylight Saving Time Enter Month Apr Day 5 Exit Month Oct Day 281 Modem Configuration File Modem speaker C Enabled Disabled Submit Reset gt System Relay Securty status amp Log Copyright 2008 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us o I T T iB nems 7 Figure 7 4 A
190. ically filled in Main Menu Mozilla Firefox i lol x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help gt 7 aa z x A htips 10 10 2 103 cgi bin main cgi SM gt G Google aS D SFECIRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations IPv6 Configuration a M Enable DHCP IP Address Prefix Length Delete D fe80 230 64ff fe04 4aa3 64 F Add a static IPv6 Address and Prefix Length IP Address Prefix Length Default Gateway Services Il Enable Daytime Protocol l Enable Time Protocol M Enable Telnet xI Enable FTP xI Enable SSH xI Enable HTTP xI Enable HTTPS Submit Reset Le NTP interface Syster Relay Securty Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us https 10 10 2 103 cgi bin shownetconf cgi 10 10 2 103 amp 4 Figure 3 72 Security Network Screen 2 of 2 3 80 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 3 4 17 1 Configuring SSH SSH can be configured from the Security SSH screen Figure 3 73 The tools supported are SSH secure shell SCP secure copy and SFTP secure file transfer protocol The NetClock implements the server components of SSH SCP and SFTP For more information on OpenSSH refer to www openSSH org SSH uses Host Keys to uniquely identify each SSH server Host
191. icle ID VID the mode in which each satellite is operating the signal strength under a specific threshold the satellite signal is not usable and the status for each satellite obee bk iee et Figure 7 14 GPS Signal Status NetClock Instruction Manual 7 23 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 7 5 1 Satellite Mode The satellite modes are as follows Idle standby Normal Acquisition C A code search mode Direct Acquisition P Y code search mode Code Lock interference Carrier Lock degraded tracking mode Carrier Track Data Collection good tracking Sequential Resynchronization Signal reacquisition recovery mode NOOR WN OO 7 5 2 Satellite Status The satellite status is a two digit number The first digit represents the code type and the second digit represents the antenna frequency These in turn correspond to encrypted unencrypted statuses NOTE A channel that is tracking no satellites will display a status of 00 This means there is no signal 7 5 2 1 First Digit Code Type 0 P code Precise Ranging code 1 C A code Coarse Acquisition code 2 Y code Encrypted Precise Ranging code 7 5 2 2 Second Digit Antenna Frequency 0 L1 RF Link GPS primary frequency 1575 42 MHz 1 L2 RF Link GPS primary frequency 1227 6 MHz 7 5 3 Zeroize The SAASM receiver includes a zeroize feature found both in the software screens through the Web User Interface Figure 7 15 and externally as a physical zeroize
192. iewMe snmp 2 xix fool Alea H sec AppRev AppDate 11 16 2007 BootRey UNF TimeMonth TimeDay TimeHour TimeMinute TimeSecond TestCount For Help press F1 Figure 3 23 Halting the Unit through SNMP File Edit View Insert Manage Config SNMPc Management Console E Administrator Supervisor 4 alese A m Ofe A 1010 128 38 Z JttSvstemObisinfo B E SnmpMibs H E Custom Tables E mgmt BS private E E CastleRock El lanmanager spectracom S S specReg specModules E specTimeFreqProducts specProducts B specTimeFreqma E E specTimeFreqConfs B specTimeFreqobjs tfsystemobjs H tfsysTestTable E tfSystemObjsinfo H E tfRefReceiver H E tfinterface m tfRelayEventObjs H E tfLocalClockObjs H tfNtpObjs a ntpvamib B specTimeFreqEvents E tfEventsv2Info H E specTimeviewMmiB E snmpY2 Map z als S tfSystem0bjsInfo 10 10 128 38 xix 0 fol alelan H sec 00 000 00 02 18 Temperature AppRev AppDate TimeMonth For Help press F1 localhost Administrator Supervisor BP start O Inbox Microsoft Outlook Budget From Last Week 4 Firefox 5 SNMPc Management Reboot Halt doc Micros GO 1 23PM Figure 3 24 Successful Halt The Se
193. igute 3 96 Event Log S Creen mrnamti aa e a a 3 115 Figure 3 97 GPS Qualification Log Screen sssssssssssssstnsrssnrntnennnnnnnnnnnnnninnnnnnnnnnnnnananannnnnnnannrnnnnaaantnnnnnaannnnnnnnnnnt 3 116 Figure 3 98 oural LOS CheGN scca istiamaidatarnd nederdel aaa 3 117 Figure 3 99 NTP LOOS ETEEN naai Pere et da ee Decne te ada E A tata hari 3 118 Prarie LOD EG Qty CE acs tie fot ttc ct ec aca a a a dP ile ctn ta N cesta tae a 3 119 Figure 3 101 Operational Log Sree Ms sec sceccstceitS ssxcecesscechcesarateced ces hiadid ceces ceoties cea ea net th a cu stvcsntanetbea seaate kensuts heated 3 120 Figure 3 102 Oscillator Log Screen secdaratccectesesteanlatnecovse accsucatin bias tictewsiatianbrrteeaaiateraatrata een Gertuatieenoeanaes 3 121 Figure 3 103 Sysiem L0G SCCM sit cinerea ni adnate a A A Maite 3 122 Pigure 3 TOA Update Log Stree eee te het cereal et eS a Galetti eal Nein aa Se 3 123 Figure 3 105 GPS Signal Status SCre nascccatuinaisisin dais ned sianiingede dei Anaraannea endian 3 124 Figure 3 106 NTP Status Screen sca c ec ecics caves terse satecs ac tcdrsdeoved naps dotecaueficaataaantecvvayitee in fiend ocigetataateanad eas 3 126 Figure 3 107 System Status Screen 1 Of 2 sessscsesssctessecteseseteseeeeseeteseeeeseetesseetesneeseestenseaeensesssnseatenseatanseass 3 127 Figure 3 108 System Status Screen 2 of 2 ics cds cocsspteestescauesces etshcsddaceeseisestntzesstuntgel ehceteduesasabtnetboctdioeenstllvatans 3 128 Figure 4 1
194. inary zero 0 having a positive pulse width equal to 0 2 of the reciprocal of the bite rate The NetClock can provide an IRIG B or IRIG E code in amplitude modulated AM or pulse width coded TTL formats A signature control feature may be enabled for any IRIG output Signature control removes the modulation code when a Time Sync Alarm is asserted IRIG FORMAT Choose the format level and carrier desired IRIG AMP CONTROL The peak to peak output voltage level into a 600 ohm load is adjusted by entering a digital control value in this field The level adjustment has no effect on TTL outputs only on AM formats Figure 3 38 shows typical output levels for digital control values from 0 255 NOTE These are nominal values only Actual values will vary from unit to unit To adjust the level precisely connect an oscilloscope to the output connector when adjusting NetClock Instruction Manual 3 33 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation IRIG Peak to Peak Voltage Peak to Peak Voltage O gt NW KHON 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 Digital Amplitude Control Values Figure 3 38 IRIG Output Level IRIG SIGNATURE When set to Sync the modulation is removed when the Time Sync Alarm is asserted When set to None the modulation will be present even if the Time Sync Alarm is asserted For reference detailed information about the IRIG B and IRIG E formats follows 3 34 NetClock Instruction Manual 9300 Series
195. ion The SSH client utilities SSH SCP and SFTP allow for several modes of user authentication SSH allows the user to remotely login or transfer files by identifying the user s account and the target machines IP address Users can be authenticated by either using their account passwords or by using a Public Private Key Pair Users keep their private key secret within their workstations or network user accounts and provide the NetClock a copy of their public key The modes of authentication supported include e Either Public Key with Passphrase or Login Account Password e Login Account Password only e Public Key with Passphrase only The first option allows users to login using either method This is the default Whichever mode works is allowed for logging in If the Public Key is not correct or the Passphrase is not valid the user is then prompted for the login account password The second option simply skips public private key authentication and immediately prompts the user for password over a secure encrypted session avoiding sending passwords in the clear Finally the last option requires the user to load a public key into the NetClock This public key must match the private key found in the users account and be accessible to the SSH SCP or SFTP client program The user must then enter the Passphrase after authentication of the keys to provide the second factor for 2 factor authentication SSH using public private key authentication is the
196. ion but that form of server authentication will not be available If the user chooses to delete both the RSA and DSA keys SSH will not function In addition if SSH Host Keys are being generated at the time of deletion the key generation processes are stopped any keys created will be deleted and all key bit sizes are set to 0 The user may choose to delete existing keys and request the creation of new keys but it is often simpler to make these requests separately Main Menu Mozilla Firefox i o x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help amp oC wg tt https 10 10 2 103 cgi bin main cgi Shy P Glz Google Q O PECHI RA COM You have logged in as admin ynchronizing Critical Operations Public Keys File aj Submit Reset v E a gt EAN BETI ERN amm BATENT Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Done 10 10 2103 5 Figure 3 74 Security SSH Screen 2 of 2 The user may create individual RSA and DSA Host Public Private Key pairs Host Keys must first be deleted before new Host Keys can be created To create a new set of host keys first 3 82 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series delete the old keys then select the create host keys checkbox and enter the key sizes you desire Then select the Submit button at the bottom of the screen Spectracom secure products typically have their initial Hos
197. ion the change who performed it and what the change was is recorded in the Journal Log Figure 3 98 NetClock Instruction Manual 3 117 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 4 Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer Eile Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 10 10 2 102 cgi bin main cgi You have logged in as admin NTP Log 16 Mar 21 42 23 ntpd 1325 synchronized to SPEC_92X_APP 0 stratum 0 16 Mar 21 42 23 ntpd 1325 time reset 0 360120 s 16 Mar 21 47 39 ntpd 1325 synchronized to SPEC_92_APP 0 stratum 0 16 Mar 21 51 03 ntpd 1325 synchronized to PPS 0 stratum 0 16 Mar 21 57 33 ntpd 1325 kernel time syne enabled 0001 16 Mar 21 58 37 ntpd 1325 synchronized to SPEC_92_APP 0 stratum 0 16 Mar 22 00 28 ntpd 1325 pps sync disabled 16 Mar 22 00 36 ntpd 1325 synchronized to SPEC_92X_APP 0 stratum 0 16 Mar 22 00 46 ntpd 1325 synchronized to PPS 0 stratum 0 24 Apr 17 38 27 ntpd 1325 ntpd exiting on signal 15 24 Apr 17 43 09 ntpd 25753 synchronized to SPEC_92X_APP 0 stratum 0 24 Apr 17 43 09 ntpd 25753 kernel time syne disabled 0041 24 Apr 17 44 12 ntpd 25753 kernel time sync enabled 0001 24 Apr 17 47 23 ntpd 25753 synchronized to PPS 0 stratum 0 DS AE SE REN SY SEEN Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us eyo i trternet Figure 3 99 NTP Log Screen The NTP Log Figure 3 99 is a running list of NTP activity on the
198. ions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE LICENSE ISSUES 8 2 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license i e both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit See below for the actual license texts Actually both licenses are BSD style Open Source licenses In case of any license issues r
199. irect response to customer needs for affordable time synchronization equipment that includes a variety of necessary and widely used security authentication and networking features 1 1 Introduction The 9300 Series NetClock time server provides disciplined timing using Network Time Protocol NTP The NetClock meets or exceeds the National Emergency Numbers Association NENA master clock standard and is ideally suited for delivering world wide split second timing to mission critical systems The 9300 series offers enhanced reliability features including oven stabilized crystal oscillator OCXO and Rubidium oscillator backups to maintain the NetClock s time standard if the time reference is lost An optional dial out modem provides additional back u and can function as the primary reference if desired The 9300 series chassis is shock and vibration resistant The 9300 series enhanced security features which can be enabled and disabled by the user include IPSec Secure Shell SSH Secure Sockets Layer SSL Secure Copy Protocol SCP Secure File Transfer Protocol SFTP and SNMP v1 v2 and v3 with host access restriction The NetClock supports IPv4 IPv6 and centralized user authentication LDAP Active Directory RADIUS NTP capabilities include peering Stratum 2 and Autokey The NetClock can be configured and its reports accessed through a Web User Interface Web Ul A Command Line Interface CLI is also provided for initial
200. ized to GPS Time is valid and within the Locked to GPS accuracy specs Blinking Green Holdover mode Not synchronized to GPS but time is still within Holdover accuracy specs Also indicates the unit is synchronized with the optional dial out modem Option 03 Yellow On No longer synchronized to GPS but no unit fault Time accuracy may not be meeting holdover specs Blinking Unit is in power up initialization mode The unit is in this mode for the brief period between Yellow power on and when it is operationally ready to receive satellite data Flashing Red GPS antenna fault This flash may occur over any of the other color conditions at runtime Red On Unit fault Time may not be valid Overrides all other indicators Blinking Red If the unit fails Power On Self Test POST then the indicator will blink in a sequence indicating the failure code consult factory Blink is defined as second on 1 2 second off Flash is defined as l29 second on 19 59 second off Table 1 1 Status Indicators Front Panel 2 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 1 3 Rear Panel The rear panel Figure 1 2 provides several different outputs that are available for interfacing the NetClock to various systems as well as a means of initially configuring the unit s network settings The rear panel also has a power jack for the power input a connection for the GPS antenna and relay contacts for alarm monitori
201. key Clear fio 0 2 102 6 1m 4s z 6 1m 4s z None z 0 10 2105 6 1m 45 z 6 1m 4s z None z fi0 2 128 20 6 im 4s z 6 1m 4s z M E m 6 1m 4s z 10 17m 4s z None z m 6 1m 4s z 710 17m 4s z None z Bij JE JE 0 0 0 0 0 NTP Servers NTP Servers specified in the following table are used only as potential time references If a server is chosen by the NetClock as the best reference the stratum level of the NetClock will drop to one above the stratum level of the chosen server M Enable Stratum 0 Reference ie GPS Modem Serial Time Code NOTE When enabled the Stratum 0 reference is ALWAYS preferred 4 Interface System Relay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Dane 10 10 2 101 amp 4 Figure 3 28 NTP References Screen 1 of 2 NOTE Check only ONE server as the preferred reference NOTE You cannot use both a Trusted Symmetrical Key ID and Autokey Autokey essentially automates the symmetrical key function and the two cannot be used together If trusted keys have been defined Figure 3 29 they will appear in the Trusted Sym Key ID dropdown menu NOTE Checking the Clear box in the NTP References grids will immediately remove a defined server from the list The dropdown menus for Min Poll and Max
202. m Message 09 OTM revd 0 998235 adv 0 0488 Dec 30 19 58 05 Spectracom spectracorm system Message 10 OTM revd 0 000755 adv 0 0479 Dec 30 19 58 06 Spectracom spectracom system Message 11 OTM revd 0 999099 adv 0 0486 Dec 30 19 58 07 Spectracom spectracom system Message 12 OTM revd 0 998285 adv 0 0499 INTPJinterface System Relay Security status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us fone 90 10 50 30 By Figure 7 12 Modem Dialout Log Screen NetClock Instruction Manual 7 17 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation The Modem Dialout Log provides information concerning the numbers dialed whether the dialouts were successful and what changes have been applied to the subsecond counter and system clock If calling a Spectracom ACTS server additional information about each time message is logged including the on time character what it is when it is received and the advance time included in the message If the sync lamp is also flashing red this is because the GPS antenna is disconnected from the NetClock This is not directly related to the modem dial out feature but if the antenna has been connected in the past it is related to the reason why the modem is now dialing out unexpectedly Antenna problem causing loss of GPS time Sync 7 18 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 7 2 Option 04 Rubidium Oscillator Option 04 p
203. m the Interface IRIG screen the user may configure the IRIG format amplitude control and signature IRIG is an acronym for Inter Range Instrumentation Group In the late 1950s this group created a series of time code standards suitable for use with recording oscillographs magnetic tape and real time transmission F Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer lol x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help A Address la http 10 10 2 102 cgi bin main cgi E co E 7 D S PECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations IRIG FORMAT amp Format B Level aM z 1000Hz is used for carrier when Level AM is selected Format E and Level AM Carrier foo gt Format E and Level TTL IRIG AMP CONTROL fize Refer to the IRIG section of the instruction manual IRIG SIGNATURE NONE z SYSTEM CLOCK UTC x Click here to edit or create local system clocks Submit Reset MA SEN E SeN SET Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us DE i internet Figure 3 37 Interface IRIG Screen Each IRIG code specifies a carrier frequency that is modulated to encode date and time as well as control bits to time stamp events Initially IRIG applications were primarily military and government associated Today IRIG is commonly used to synchronize voice loggers recall recorders and sequential event loggers found in emergency dispatch centers and power
204. me Source field Figure 3 58 Such an indication Ext 1PPS means that the NetClock has received time information from the specified time source but is currently maintaining time using the 1PPS input signal 3 64 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series e OSO erne plore oj x Eile Edit View Favorites Tools Help a Address https 10 10 50 32 cgi bin main cgi Go E z 0 PECTRACOM You have logged in as admin ing Critical Operations Dynamic System Information Uptime 0 years 0 days 22 hours 1 minutes 45 seconds Current internal temperature 42 00 C 107 60 F Major Alarm is ON Minor Alarm is ON Time Sync status In Syne Haldover Time Source Modem ACTS Ext 1PPS NTP Service Status In Syne Stratum 1 Static System Information Product Name is Spectracom Corp Model 9283 Application Name is hs92XX Application Rev is 3 2 0 Application Date is 09 11 2006 SSH Rev is OpenSSH_4 1p1 SSL Rev is OpenSSL 0 9 7i fips 14 Oct 2005 Unit s Serial Number 455 MAC Address 00 30 64 04 63 de System Test Results NTP interface System Relay Security status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Figure 3 58 System Status Screen 1PPS Input Indicated 3 4 14 Serial Time Code Setup From the Serial Time Code Setup screen Figure 3 59 9388 models only t
205. min System Log Mar 16 21 38 13 Spectracom spectracom system System running Supervisor InTPfinterface System RelayfSecurty status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us Figure 3 103 System Log Screen The System Log Figure 3 103 is a running list of system information and status messages that may be used by factory personnel for troubleshooting This log records internal system information that is not intended for customer use 3 122 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series jain Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 10 10 2 102 cgi bin main cgi SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations Update Log Feb 23 19 21 10 Vile2 update Created software backup optlupgrade backup bundle backup 2 999 6 tar Feb 23 19 21 11 Vile2 update Installed update file opt upgradeftemp upup tar Feb 23 19 21 28 Vile2 update System rebooting to complete update Feb 23 19 25 01 Vile update Created software backup optupgrade backup bundlefbackup 2 999 6 tar bz2 Feb 23 19 25 02 Vile2 update Installed update file optluporade tempns296 hs298 tar bz2 Feb 23 19 25 17 Vile2 update System rebooting to complete update Mar 6 13 12 37 Vile2 update Created software backup foptfuparade backup bundlefbackup 2 999 8 tar bz2 Mar 6 13 12 38 Vile2 update Installed upd
206. most secure method of authenticating users for SSH SCP or SFTP sessions The web browser user interface provides the means for the user to view and edit the authorized_keys file to add Public Keys Using FTP SCP or SFTP the user may also retrieve the authorized_keys file from the ssh directory NetClock Instruction Manual 3 83 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation An example of a user adding a public key to the authorized_keys file is shown below Users are required to create private and public key pairs on their workstation or within a private area in their network account These keys may be RSA or DSA and may be any key bit length as supported by the SSH client tool These public keys are stored in a file in the ssh directory named authorized_keys The file is to be formatted such that the key is followed by the optional comment with only one key per line The file format line terminations and other EOL or EOF characters should correspond to UNIX conventions not Windows If a user deletes all Public Keys Public Private Key Authentication is disabled If the user has selected SSH authentication using the Public Key with Passphrase option login and file transfers will be forbidden The user must select a method allowing the use of account password authentication to enable login or file transfers using SCP or SFTP If a user wants to completely control the public keys used for authentication a correctly formatted authorized_keys file
207. n When the receiver is unable to track any satellites and the time synchronization lamp is red When the receiver time is derived from the battery backed clock or set manually through the Setup Port Interface The leap second indicator L is defined as When a leap second correction is not scheduled at the end of the month Space L when a leap second correction is scheduled at the months end NetClock Instruction Manual 5 7 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Example 0004 50085 124536 1942 L The example data stream provides the following information Data format 4 Sync Status Time synchronized to GPS Modified Julian Date 50085 Time 12 45 36 1942 UTC Leap Second A leap second is scheduled at the end of the month 5 6 Format 7 This format provides a time data stream with millisecond resolution The Format 7 data stream consists of indicators for time synchronization status leap second and Daylight Saving Time Time data reflects UTC time and is in the 24 hour format Format 7 data structure is shown below NOTE Format 7 cannot be configured for a Time Zone Offset or with automatic Daylight Saving Time adjustment Attempting to configure a Local clock using Data Format 7 with either a Time Zone Offset or automatic DST rule will result in an error message CR LF I YY DDD HH MM SS SSSL D CR LF where CR Carriage Return LF Line Feed Time Sync Status space YY Year without century 99 00
208. n 9300 Series 6 Serial Setup Interface Commands The NetClock can be configured using the serial setup interface port and a terminal emulation program as discussed in Section 3 2 At the Command Line Interface CLI the user can manage files and configure product settings The available CLI commands are as follows time time reboot reboot app halt halt log log COMMAND OBJECT HANDLE option option COMMAND OPTION PRODUCT VALUE Lte ltc COMMAND INDEX NAME net net COMMAND Arguments sys sys COMMAND Arguments mdo mdo COMMAND Arguments ser ser COMMAND SERIAL Arguments rem rem COMMAND REMOTE Arguments irig irig COMMAND ARG frq frq COMMAND INDEX Arguments stc stc COMMAND Arguments One additional command help displays the available commands at the CLI Typing help and a specific command for example help time or help option and then pressing the enter key displays detailed information about the command NOTE Commands typed at the CLI are case sensitive All terms and commands entered must be lower case 6 1 time help time Use the time command to read the current system date and time USAGE time 6 2 reboot The reboot is used to warm boot the unit without having to disconnect or reconnect the power supply The reboot command is intended only for administrators and is available at the admin security level NOTE This command provides a convenien
209. n a serial port Ite Sets the reference clock on the serial output To add configure local clocks use command ltc baud Configures the baud rate of a serial port 6 10 rem The rem command allows the rear panel Remote output s to be configured from the console port This command requires admin level login to modify help rem The rem group of commands are used to setup remote serial ports RS485 USAGE rem COMMAND REMOTE Arguments COMMAND disp Displays the current remote serial port settings all Configures all settings of a remote serial port fmt Configures the format of the serial port output lte Sets the reference clock on the remote serial output To add configure local clocks use command ltc baud Configures the baud rate of a remote serial port 6 11 irig help irig The irig group of commands are used to control the irig subsystem USAGE irig COMMAND ARG COMMAND disp b brb e amp ltc sig disp Display the current IRIG port settings b Sets the irig output to format B brb Sets the irig output to format B Rubidium TTL level This option is only available on Rubidium units e Sets the irig output to format E amp Sets the amplitude level for AM signals Ite Sets the reference clock for the IRIG output sig Sets the signature control of the IRIG port 6 4 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 6 12 frq help frq The frq group of commands are
210. nables NetClock Instruction Manual 1 1 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation NetClock equipped computer networks to synchronize all elements of network hardware and software including system logs over LANs or WANs anywhere on the planet 1 2 1 Front Panel The front panel of the NetClock Figure 1 1 consists of two separate illuminated status LEDs and two LCD displays depending on the model The LCDs when installed are configurable using the Web Browser User Interface Web UI Options include time date day of year software versions network information fonts and date formats The status LEDs Sync and Power indicate whether the NetClock is synchronized and whether power is applied to the unit The Power LED will not light if power is not applied It will indicate green if power is applied The Sync LED has multiple states Table 1 1 Figure 1 1 Front Panel Display 1 2 2 Front Panel LED Indicators Power Green always on Sync Tri color LED indicates the time data accuracy and equipment fault LAN Green Good Link indicator Yellow Network activity 1 2 3 Front Panel LED Status Indications At power up a quick LED test is run The unit displays a Red Green Orange sequence LABEL COLOR ACTIVITY DESCRIPTION POWER Green On Power is supplied to the NetClock Off Power is disconnected SYNC Multiple Off No fault but not synchronized to GPS Holdover spec has not been met States Green On Synchron
211. nchronization without the modem placing a call If the modem is strictly a backup to the external reference this period can be lengthened to longer than the typical amount of time needed to synchronize to the external reference The System Modem Calibrate screen Figure 7 10 is used to calibrate the modem for increased accuracy of the dial out calls The calibration procedure is not required but may be used to provide greater accuracy of future modem calls The calibration process using several dial out helps compensate for inherit internal software processing lags as well as phone network delays as well Different locations may experience different latencies as well as time of day latencies may also vary 7 12 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series e OSO erne ore B x Eile Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address la htta 10 2 128 14 cgi bin main cgi Go a 7 D SPECT RACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations The calibrate feature makes several calls while in sync with another time source in order to characterize the call latency Calibrate Status Not Calibrated CALIBRATE SETTINGS F Calibrate now I Reset latency value Latency value fioszs microseconds Manually Set Latency Number of calibration calls 25 Calibration call interval fo Days fo Hours 5 Minutes Reset interface System RelayfSecurity Status amp Log Copyright 20
212. nd choose the types of services allowed to request authentication from the LDAP server Main Menu Mozilla Firefox E lol x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help gt E i O htps 10 10 2 103 cg bin main cgi M gt Id Google Q ip D SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations Required information by LDAP client LDAP servers Active Directory on Windows Server 2000 2003 IPv4 IPv6 Hostname Distinguished name of the search base Distinguished Name to bind server with _ Credential to bind server with SS Search filter Login attribute used for search mo KARS SES SEN EE SET Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Done 10 10 2103 amp Figure 3 83 Security LDAP Client Configuration Screen 1 of 2 From the LDAP Client Configuration screen the user specifies the addresses or hostnames of the LDAP server s and inputs other fields that must be provided by the LDAP server administrator One of the servers and one only must be defined as the main LDAP server The other servers are replicas NetClock Instruction Manual 3 97 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Main Menu Mozilla Firefox mf x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help gt S i oO htps 10 10 2 103 cgi bin main cgi S gt Gle coogle
213. ne Major Alarm Time Sync Reset Interface System Relay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us one o E e 7 Figure 3 42 Interface Frequency Output Screen The rear panel 10 MHz output can be disabled in the event of an alarm condition or loss of time synchronization This feature is known as signature control From the Interface Frequency Output screen Figure 3 42 the user may select from three signature control outputs None 10 MHz output continues regardless of alarm condition Major Alarm 10 MHz output stops if the NetClock experiences a major alarm Time Sync 10 MHz output stops if the NetClock loses time synchronization NOTE Oscillator disciplining depends on a very stable reference 1PPS input signal Because of this the Modem dial out option Option 03 available for the 9300 Series cannot be used for oscillator disciplining and hence does not result in enabling 10MHz frequency outputs when time synchronization is achieved using these time sources The NetClock must be synchronized to GPS with a 3 D fix minimum of four satellites 3 42 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series when the 10 MHz output must be disciplined for accuracy Without a 3 D fix present and with signature control set to None the frequency output will always be present but not disciplined for accuracy Because a window mounted antenna will
214. ne is completely independent of the others Enter the number of the event that you wish to edit view and click the Edit View button 3 70 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series A Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer molki Eile Edit View Favorites Tools Help a Address http 10 10 2 102 cqi bin main cgi You have logged in as admin Note There are a total of 128 event timers Please enter the ID of the event scheduler you would like to edit or view Event Scheduler ID l 1 128 Edit View Currently Scheduled Events Relay not configured as Event Timer Enabledi Disabled Relay Action Frequency Event InTPfinterface system RelayfSecurty status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us yore lig tnternet 7 Figure 3 64 Event Timer Relay Screen NetClock Instruction Manual 3 71 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 4 Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 10 10 2 102 cgi bin main cgi D SIP EGC CC You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Note The time on this page should be UTC time ol Time accuracy is within 100 milliseconds Event Scheduler ID is 1 Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3 Enabled Disabled Delete C ON OFF Frequency Hourly Minute Second Milisecond Daily
215. nerated If using only self signed certificates the user should choose the fields based on the company s security policy Many certificate authorities simply provide you with a certificate in the form of a plain text file If your certificate is provided in this manner and the certificate is provided in the x509 PEM format you may simply copy and paste the text into the web UI Paste the text into the Update Certificate box make sure that the Update Certificate checkbox is selected and submit your changes NOTE Only x509 PEM certificates can be loaded into the Web UI 3 4 17 5 2 Updating x509 PEM Certificate Files Through External File Transfer If you are provided with a certificate file and the certificate is not in the X509 PEM format you may use an alternative method to update the certificate Name the file using the following scheme File Type File Name x509 PEM cert pem x509 DER cert der pkcs7 PEM certpem p 7c pks7c DER certder p7c Next use an FTP SCP or SFTP program to connect to the NetClock Copy your certificate to the default FTP starting directory Then select the Update Certificate from uploaded file checkbox select the appropriate file name in the associated drop down box and click the Submit button Be aware that it may take several minutes for the certificate request the private key and self signed certificate are created The larger the key the longer amount of
216. ng and event alerts e O RJA PPRQ OUT ES OUT EAS OETA C RS485REMOTE SERULSETUP ETHERNET Vaiia ar PORT 1 PORT 2 INTERFACE RELAY 1 RECAY 2 RELAYS SrGrGrer se Te oo ere SHEL SLES o Osea AAAAAAAAAA RSR Figure 1 2 NetClock Rear Panel FREQ OUT is a BNC output providing a 10MHz sinewave output 1PPS OUT is a BNC output providing a once per second squarewave output IRIG OUT is a BNC output providing an IRIG signal for synchronizing certain voice recorders 1PPS IN is a BNC female input used to provide an external 1PPS reference Serial Comm 1 and Serial Comm 2 are DB9 female connectors that provide RS 232 data output to devices that can accept an RS 232 input for synchronization The two RS 485 connectors RS 485 PORT 1 and PORT 2 provide an RS 485 data output for synchronizing devices that accept an RS 485 input such as wall display clocks and add on Ethernet Time Servers The SERIAL SETUP INTERFACE provides network and output port configuration capability The ETHERNET connector provides an interface to the network for NTP synchronization and to obtain access to the Web UI It has two small indicator lamps Good Link green LED and Activity orange LED The Good Link light indicates a connection to the network is present The activity light will blink when network traffic is detected Ethernet Yellow On LAN Activity detected Off No LAN traffic detected Ethernet Green On LAN Link established 10 or 100 Mb s
217. ngth Option 04 and Option 05 oscillators only Oscillator Option Estimated Error Rates Time to reach 2 ms TCXO Standard 1 0 milliseconds hour nominal 2 hours typical TCXO Standard 7 2 milliseconds hour worst case 17 minutes OCXO Option 05 72 microseconds hour nominal 28 hours Rb Option 04 0 18 microseconds hour nominal 463 days Table 3 6 Estimated Oscillator Error Rates NOTE The TCXO Error rate is a worst case estimate and not typically this value The nominal value assumed has been 1 millisecond hour yielding 2 hours holdover times The OCXO and Rb oscillators use the nominal values for estimated error rate to calculate error at the end of holdover on the web browser user interface The TCXO does not estimate error for holdover But if it did it probably should use the nominal value which is more typical Typically the error rates for a disciplined oscillator at 25 degrees Celsius will be lower than these values 3 62 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series A Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer lol x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Address la https 10 10 2 103 cgi bin main cgi Go ce D SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations Holdover Length Default 1 Day 0 Hours 0 Minutes Time bounds Min 15 Minutes Max 5 Years 0 Days 0 Hours 0 Minutes Set By Time
218. nnnnnnnaannnnnnnaannnnnna 3 31 Figure 3 37 Interface IRIG S Cree szavecdccidscsssiasdecainad sealants Nid etvederad nse wearin Nand nMan Gaudin aeree aat 3 32 Figure 3 38 IRIG Output LEV letatesce tees Acct sctarne ite aie stented ede ecesee acy eam elas eeake Bes Aree ttlas pean atest 3 34 Figure 3 39 IRIG B Time Code description ss nct casr set ance tak stites sian ee eAcesaexes ents oa da shasesplae tanned eee 3 35 Figure 3 40 IRIG E Time Code GS Cri GHON csascescccastedaccabletees achect sts nenittect tec tacd eas lacsesabes lett ethane terentanectilitanss 3 39 vi NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series Figure 3 41 Interface Front Panel Display Screen sssssssesessesscssssesscsssssssssssuesnssseessnssssussussssessuesseessusseeesseseeesseesees 3 41 Figure 3 42 Interface Frequency Output SCre n sesessessscssssscsessesssseesssssesnseseenseatenseatenseseenseatenseatesseatsnseatensestans 3 42 Figure 3 43 Interface Set to Defaults Screen axscchcelacssseczsteassoutecestesbesdiaacened stareratiatenctib adieeatahentanereaiieiuite 3 43 Figure 3 44 Configuring Serial Port 1 for Sysplex Timing sssssssssisssssisssssirssssrrssssrnsnsnrnnnsnrnnnnannnnnrrnnnnrensnrrennrreenns 3 44 Figure 3 49 System Menti msaren iennet iavc decd ladda E candi dled Medved Na 3 45 Figure 340 System SNMP S ChEGIY ieii i E E E E A aA 3 46 Fig re 3 47 SpectracomiS M Bairunsncioracnainnie n a aa 3 47 Figure 3 48 System Alarm SCreen s
219. nssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com ee O O O E R O E O O O R E R k E O O O O e R o O O E E k e o E O O e O E E E e Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL a a This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it
220. nstruction Manual 7 27 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 7 7 5 Serial Port 2 Format 09 Configuration The NetClock s SERIAL FMT09 port ships from the factory properly configured for Format 09 If changes occur in the field that require reconfiguration of the ASCII Serial Time Code output for Format 09 the user may make these changes from the NetClock s Interface menu This is found within the Web User Interface and groups the NetClock s Interface configuration functions From this menu the user may access the Interface Serial Port Remote Port IRIG Display and Frequency Output screens for the standard 9383 NetClock For Option 11 Serial Port 2 must be configured as follows The unit reads Serial Port 2 as SERIAL FMT09 when Option 11 is installed This change does not affect Serial Port 1 which operates according to standard 9383 specifications Main Menu Mozilla Firefox i Ioj x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help lt X a Of https 10 10 128 59 cgi binjmain cai L MyStuff INFO STUFF _ WorkInfo _ Tech Info __ Computer Stuff venders RoHS Info __ Shopping L NTP INFO TNC N You have logged in as admin BAUD RATE 9600 z DATA FORMAT 02 gt REQUEST CHAR Multicast User defined T SYSTEM CLOCK UTC z Click here to edit or create local system clocks Submit Reset NTP interface System Relay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corpo
221. ntenna status Under Current Flag This flag is displayed if the undercurrent bit is set This indicates that little or no current is being drawn through the circuit which may be due to a disconnected antenna a severed antenna cable or a damaged antenna The receiver will attempt to continue the normal acquisition and tracking process regardless of the antenna status Undercurrent indication lt 8 mA Overcurrent indication gt 80 mA NOTE This condition will also be present if a GPS antenna splitter that does not contain a load to simulate an antenna being present is being used Latitude N S IDD MM SS SSSS Longitude E W DDD MM SS SSSS Where N North latitude S South Latitude E East Longitude W West Longitude D Degree M Minute S Second Quality QQQQQ QQQQQ Result of GPS qualification either PASSED or FAILED The GPS signal is considered qualified when at least one satellite is received having a vehicle ID of at least 4 that are available for Position Fix Usage while in the normal mode of operation Or at least 1 satellite that is available for position fix when the unit is single satellite mode Information on each satellite the receiver is currently tracking is presented in table form The table columns are described below CHANNEL Channel Number of the GPS receiver 1 12 VID Vehicle satellite Identification Number 1 37 NetClock Instruction Manual 3 125 9300 Series Spectracom Corpo
222. o shunt potentially damaging voltages on the antenna coax to ground Refer to the Model 8226 Impulse Suppressor Section for a complete description of the Model 8226 2 6 2 Cable Lengths The maximum recommended antenna cable length when installed without a preamplifier is 300 feet of LMR 400 or equivalent cable with a maximum attenuation loss of 16 dB Figure 2 1 26 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation Model 9300 Series When selecting alternate antenna cable sources the attenuation characteristics at the GPS frequency of 1575 42 MHz must be known To ensure optimum receiver performance the total antenna cable attenuation must not exceed 16 dB regardless of cable length Cable attenuation of greater than 16 dB requires the use of a Model 8227 Inline Amplifier Figure 2 2 Install the impulse suppressor between Model 8225 the antenna and the NetClock NetClock 300 of LMR 400 or Equivalent Maximum 16 dB Attenuation Maximum Figure 2 1 Cabling without Inline Amplifier NetClock Instruction Manual 27 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Install impulse suppressor between Model 8225 the antenna and the amplifier whenever possible 5 Foot Cable Included NetClock 300 Maximum 400 Maximum LMR 400 LMR 400 16 dB Maximum 21 dB Maximum 450 Minimum 700 Maximum 24 dB Minimum 37 dB Maximum Figure 2 2 Cabling with Inline Amplifier 2 6 3 Model 8224 GPS
223. oascaxetedceds besssedh una sheeahaachaveted tacsaseasostaa bisastastausdeastansabasndasuessbeattennaiaas 2 8 Figure 2 3 Model 8226 Impulse SUppreSSOr iice since Mart ate crt Ae he ed he ula eae a Ned dle Mate da rcs 2 9 NetClock Instruction Manual v 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Figure 2 4 Model 8227 Inline Amplifier ass ccccicvssscetceusssswcnesveos iecsvetsaies Yess deusvess anes dena Gets vabvalans covaavedahsoiens aeavielonbatecehanidt 2 9 Figure 2 5 Serial Port Pin Configuration sicssesccscssestsazacsscasessadaseacandhacshastiazsaatthaa iasdtaanvaracban inislaataantiansdiastaaeadbataatdans 2 11 Figure 2 6 Remote QUPUISsanienonininaanuna e a i ani 2 12 Figure 22 725R SAG SOUDU aeaaaee T ARA 2 13 Figure 2 6 OneWay Bus InStallatonweicenuse nineties 2 14 Figur 2 9 Split Bus Contiguration ca aricept st gi as a a MN at ral Nd 2 15 Figure 2 10 Wire Strain Relieh wis iasssiitsndedsand mnteiunndnindis tateiunianiduianaaniadanndansads 2 16 Figure 2 11 TimeView RS 485 Interface ssscsssscssessssssssssssssssssssscssssesssssssssuessesssnsssssssnseseessussseessussnssseessesseeessessaes 2 16 Figure 2 12 Model 8179T TimeTap RS 485 Interface cscsssessessessssessesscsssncssssssnsssssssuessesssnssseessussseseeesseeseeesseses 2 17 Figure 2 13 Model 9288 RS 485 Interface secs isccleescascocdsssetsssdcaaveusd sited ondaodiosadtuczyssatiaiiaandamedarasaannieinaMmamaanen 2 17 Figure 2 14 TimeBurst RS 485 Interface sacs cts0n0latiaraiamaersuiksevs
224. om system 0 1 8 646 9 53 10 51 11 555Q 1305 Mar 16 23 00 00 Spectracom spectracom system 7 41 8 1708 9 1851 Q 3600 Mar 17 00 00 00 Spectracom spectracom system 6 544 7 3056 Q 3600 Mar 17 01 00 00 Spectracom spectracom system 7 1231 8 2369 Q 3600 Mar 17 02 00 00 Spectracom spectracom system 6 198 7 1378 8 1586 9 438 Q 3600 Mar 17 03 00 00 Spectracom spectracom system 6 1987 7 1613 Q 3600 Mar 17 04 00 00 Spectracom spectracorn system 7 1444 8 1998 9 158 Q 3600 Mar 17 05 00 00 Spectracom spectracom system 8 3600 Q 3600 Mar 17 06 00 00 Spectracom spectracom system 7 610 8 527 9 2463 Q 3600 Mar 17 07 00 00 Spectracom spectracom system 6 610 7 2701 8 289 Q 3600 Mar 17 08 00 00 Spectracom spectracom system 6 382 7 3218 Q 3600 Mar 17 09 00 00 Spectracom spectracom system 6 97 7 286 8 2578 9 372 10 267 Q 3600 Mar 17 10 NNAN Snertracam snectracam eveteml A 317 7 ARR A ARNN INTPIinterface system Relay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us ome lip internet Figure 3 97 GPS Qualification Log Screen The GPS Qualification Log Figure 3 97 is a running list of the NetClock s GPS satellite signal activity 3 116 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer ES File
225. om system Remote Port 2 Version 2 03 Mar 16 21 38 40 Spectracom spectracom system Clock time source changed to GPS Mar 16 21 38 44 Spectracom spectracom system Clock entering sync Apr 24 17 37 19 Spectracom spectracom system Clock adjusted by 7776000 seconds Apr 24 17 37 20 Spectracom spectracom system Clock adjusted by 7776000 seconds INTPIinterface SystemRelay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us Melos S EE iinternet Figure 3 101 Operational Log Screen The Operational Log Figure 3 101 is a running list of NetClock operations such as system updates and clock synchronizations 3 120 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series File Edit View Favorites Tools Help D Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved SPECTRACOM Synchronizing Critical Operations Oscillator Log You have logged in as admin Apr 20 21 59 53 Spectracom spectracom systern Apr 20 22 01 33 Spectracom spectracom system Apr 20 22 03 13 Spectracom spectracom system Apr 20 22 04 53 Spectracom spectracom system Apr 20 22 06 33 Spectracom spectracom system Apr 20 22 08 13 Spectracom spectracom system Apr 20 22 09 53 Spectracom spectracom system Apr 20 22 11 33 Spectracom spectracom system Apr 20 22 13 13 Spectracom spectracom system Apr 20 22 14 53 Spectracom spectracom
226. ommends using Data Format 02 meaning the Data Format value in the NetClock must be changed from the factory default to match the factory default of the 9388 3 30 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series NOTE Data Format 2 is always a Coordinated Universal Time UTC output It cannot have a Time Zone Offset or the Daylight Saving Time DST rule enabled Conversion to local lime is accomplished by the device receiving the data An error will be generated if a Time Zone Offset or DST rule is applied to Data Format 2 NTP never outputs local time A Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer O x Eile Edit View Favorites Tools Help amp Address la htta 10 10 2 102 cgi bin main cgi Go S Z D SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations BAUD RATE 2600 gt DATA FORMAT 00 gt SYSTEM CLOCK UTC Click here to edit or create local system clocks Reset NTP interface System Relay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us a trternet Figure 3 36 Interface Remote Port 2 Screen Clicking the link to create and edit local systems clocks will display the Local System Clock screen Refer to the System configuration screens in this manual for information on setting and editing local system clocks NetClock Instruction Manual 3 3 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Fro
227. on Manual 3 25 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Using Autokey essentially automates the trusted symmetrical key feature From the Autokey screen Figure 3 31 the user can click to enable or disable Autokey enter a passphrase readable ASCII no spaces and check Generate Certificate to generate a certificate in the text window at the bottom of the screen NOTE Generate Certificate must always be clicked to generate the first certificate If generating a new certificate after the first certificate the menu will change to read Regenerate Certificate NOTE Click the Trusted box on only ONE NetClock unit the one that is closest to Stratum 0 Main Menu Mozilla Firefox 5 x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help gt S eo htps 10 10 2 103 cg bin main cgi amp gt e Gl Google S Synchronizing Critical Operations O SPECIRACOM You have logged in as admin Autokey Service aj Enabled Disabled Passphrase C C C Autokey Certificate I Generate Certificate I Trusted Autokey Groupkey None Generate Upload Keep Current Groupkey Below Submit Reset xl Interface SEAN E E EET Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us htips 10 10 2 103 cgi bin showntpdautokey cgi 10 10 2 103 amp 4 Figure 3 31 NTP Autokey Screen 3 26 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 93
228. on Screen 2 of 2 NOTE Any remote syslog server that is entered to receive log messages must be properly configured to accept incoming syslog messages 3 68 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 3 4 16 Configuring and Testing Relays The Relay menu groups the NetClock s relay functions Figure 3 62 From this menu the user may access screens configure test and reset the relay outputs and event timers F Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer i loj x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations Ma SERS BES SEN SES SET Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us H Internet Figure 3 62 Relay Menu The operational status can be monitored remotely using the TIMER ALARM RELAYS connector on the rear panel This connector provides the common NO and NC contacts for three relays These relays can be connected to an alarm lamp horn or other indicator to warn when the clock accuracy or operation has been affected or to signal the triggering of a programmed event The relay contacts are rated at 2 0 amps 30VDC The web browser user interface allows the assignment to each relay of one of three functions Major Alarm Minor Alarm and Event Timer To assign a function to a relay click the radio button that lines up with both the function and the relay The rela
229. orithm defines another algorithm used for Phase 1 negotiation Select HMAC MD5 or HMAC SHA 1 as desired or required Authentication Method defines the means of Phase 1 authentication used preshared keys or X 509 certificates Preshared Keys The easiest way to authenticate using the IKE daemon is through preshared keys These keys must be defined in a file uploaded to the location specified in the Using Preshared key located in field NOTE After the file is uploaded its file privileges will be changed automatically to deny unauthorized users access to the preshared keys This means you will not be able to access the file after uploading it Always keep an extra copy of the file on hand in another location The preshared key file should have the following syntax 192 168 2 100 passwordl 500 a1 password2 3ffe 501 ffff 3 password3 This file is organized in columns The first column holds the identity of the peer authenticated by the preshared key The second column contains the keys X 509 Certificates The IKE daemon supports the use of X 509 certificates for authentication Spectram supplies two means of providing the public private key pair to the NetClock The first approach is through the user interface on the IPSec IKE SA Configuration screen Specify the Certificate Files Path and Peer s Certificate File name then select Md5 or Sha to specify the Signature Algorithm You must also specify the RSA Private Key Length to
230. ory Bookmarks Tools Help 3 https 10 10 2 101 cgi binfmain cgi Sle gt G e coogle IQ gt on J D SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operation ie HTTPS Configuration The Web Server Certificate installed must use the same Private Key used to generate the Certificate Request Both the Certificate and Private Key must be installed Exit after the new Certificate and Private Key files are installed to ensure proper reloading by the web server Certificate Request Parameters Required Field I Create Certificate Request and Self Signed Certificate Signature Algorithm MD5 Private Key Pass Phrase RSA Private Key Bit Length fo24 Country Name State Or Province Name Locaiy Nam Organization Name S S Organizational Unit Name Common Name e g Hostname or IP Email Address Challenge Password l Optional Company Name Self Signed Certificate Expiration Days f7300 xl ITP interface system Relay Security status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Done 10 10 2101 amp 4 Figure 3 75 Security HTTPS Screen 1 of 2 NetClock Instruction Manual 3 87 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 3 4 17 5 1 Updating x509 PEM Certificate Files using the Web UI The user is required to select a signature algorithm a private key passphrase of at least 4 characters
231. ound DCLS IRIG IN for single ended DCLS IRIG IN NC NC NC NC NetClock Instruction Manual 7 21 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 7 4 2 IRIG Input Setup From the IRIG Input setup screen Figure 7 13 the user may configure the source year to be used with the IRIG input time code By default the year fields in the IRIG message are ignored and a user defined value is used NOTE Make sure the year is set correctly when the NetClock is installed If the year is not set correctly before NTP achieves time synchronization it will use the value entered The unit will also default to the year entered if it is powered down during the rollover of the year If the NetClock was not switched on during the rollover this value must be updated NOTE When the IRIG Input year is updated the NTP server must be restarted from the NTP Web UI page or the NetClock rebooted for the new year value to take effect 4 Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer lol x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help a Address la https 10 10 50 20 cgi bin main cgi gt E K Si o PECTRACOM You have logged in as admin ynchy pations ronizing Critical Opes This page is used to configure the IRIG input time signal Currently IRIG B format both AM and DCLS TTL is supported IRIG Input Year C Use year from IRIG input signal Use specified year 2006 Submit Reset NTP interface SVS
232. out Log Screen sactsciscccdtca tantsntsansvaoicderbtoust eds asbustan avcadusbastat daiseaitad buctaceiutidslasbteastesducatodts 7 17 Figure Fe STAG Mput S Cree N ssosedcrsseatesceech Ginn i e rN a Meas a naeia 7 22 Fig re l4 GPS Signal ote LUG ninaninata e E A E O EE te dency elu aac y 7 23 Figure 7 157 Zer0ize S Cre efisien ennaa a a a a e a tan MetiaatdNaian 7 25 Figure 7 16 Serial Port COnfQura tion scisasi ceed scias dosa vas vsdaias dest tend vesdaied esd tad wolavnndani AN EAAN ANKKAA donnie ni nrnna 7 28 Underwriters Laboratory UL has not tested the performance or reliability of the Global Positioning System GPS hardware operating software or other aspects of this product UL has only tested for fire shock or casualties as outlined in Ul s Standard s for Safety for Information Technology Equipment UL60950 1 UL Certification does not cover the performance or reliability of the GPS hardware and GPS operating software UL MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS WARRANTIES OR CERT IFICATIONS WHATSOEVER REGARDING THE PERFORMANCE OR RELIABILITY OF ANY GPS RELATED FUNCTIONS OF THIS PRODUCT viii NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 1 The 9300 Series NetClock Spectracom Corporation is a leading manufacturer of precise time keeping devices used to synchronize critical operations Our products provide accurate reliable Legally Traceable Time across your networks The Spectracom 9300 series NetClock is a d
233. ox gsfc nasa gov 20 mailto jbj chatham usdesign com 21 mailto Hans Lambermont nl origin it com 22 mailto H Lambermont chello nl 23 mailto phk FreeBSD ORG 24 http www4 informatik uni erlangen de kardel 25 mailto Frank Kardel informatik uni erlangen de 26 mailto jones hermes chpc utexas edu 27 mailto dkatz cisco com 28 mailto leres ee 1bl gov 29 mailto 1lindholm eucs ubc ca 30 mailto louie ni umd edu 31 mailto thorinnediku dk 32 mailto mills udel edu 33 mailto moeller gwdgvl dnet gwdg de 34 mailto mogul pa dec com 35 mailto tmoore fievel daytonoh ncr com 36 mailto kamal whence com 37 mailto derek toybox demon co uk 38 mailto d hd org 39 mailto Rainer Pruy informatik uni erlangen de 40 mailto dirce zk3 dec com 41 mailto wsanchez apple com 42 mailto mrapple quack kfu com 43 mailto jack innovativeinternet com 44 mailto schnitz unipress com 45 mailto shields tembel org 46 mailto pebbles jpl nasa gov 47 mailto harlan pfcs com 48 mailto ken sdd hp com 49 mailto ajit ee udel edu 50 mailto tsuruoka nc fukuoka u ac jp 51 mailto vixie vix com 52 mailto Ulrich Windlerz uni regensburg de 53 ile localhost backroom ntp stable html index htm 54 mailto mills udel edu OYHAHAWNH This file is part of the OpenSSH software The licences which components of this software fall under are as follows First we will summarize and say that all components are under a BSD licence
234. plished WARNING This equipment has a connection between the earthed conductor of the DC supply circuit and the earthing conductor This equipment shall be connected directly to the DC supply system earthing electrode conductor or to a bonding jumper from an earthing terminal bar or bus to which the DC supply system earthing electrode conductor is connected This equipment shall be located in the same immediate area such as adjacent cabinets as any other equipment that has a connection between the earthed conductor of the same DC supply circuit and the earthing conductor and also the point of earthing of the DC system The DC system shall not be earthed elsewhere The DC supply source is to be located within the same premises as this equipment Switching or disconnected devices shall not be in the earthed circuit conductor between the DC source and the point of the connection of the earthing electrode conductor CAUTION Electronic equipment is sensitive to Electrostatic Discharge ESD Observe all ESD precautions and safeguards when handling Spectracom equipment CAUTION Once power is applied to the unit DO NOT disconnect power unless the HALT command is first issued to the NetClock Refer to Product Configuration for information on issuing the HALT command 1 If desirable install the rack mount ears on the two sides of the front panel and install the unit in a standard 19 inch rack cabinet 2 Connect the NetClock
235. ports IPv6 and IPv4 as of this writing IPSec defines a Security Association SA consisting of secured communications between two network devices Configuring IPSec requires us to define SA Policy SAP and SA Descriptors SAD SAP determines what network traffic can or must be secured through IPSec SAD describes actively secured conversations All network traffic for an SA contains an identical Security Parameter Index SPI 3 4 22 1 AH vs ESP An Authentication Header AH and an Encapsulating Security Payload ESP are the primary protocols used by IPSec They authenticate AH or authenticate and encrypt ESP the data across that connection Typically they are used independently but it is possible to use them together The NetClock supports both protocols 3 4 22 2 Transport Mode vs Tunnel Mode Transport mode provides a secure connection between two endpoints by encapsulating the IP payload Tunnel mode encapsulates the entire IP packet NOTE Tunnel mode is used to form a traditional Virtual Private Network VPN in which the tunnel creates a secure path across a distrusted Internet connection The NetClock supports Transport mode ONLY 3 4 22 3 MD5 vs SHA 1 vs DES vs 3DES vs AES An IPSec connection can use two or three encryption choices from among those available Authentication calculates an Integrity Check Value ICV over the data packet s contents It is usually built on a hash algorithm for example MD5 or SHA 1
236. product configuration through the serial setup port Once configured the NetClock can be accessed under appropriate security policies anywhere within a network The product features browser based remote diagnostics and control as well as Flash memory for remote software upgrades A 10 100 Mbps Ethernet LAN port provides support for Network Time Protocol NTP over a variety of platforms including Windows 2003 2000 and XP Cisco UNIX Linux and more Remote control and monitoring can also be performed through SNMP and Telnet NOTE All features described are not available on all NetClock variants 1 2 Inputs and Outputs What Can the NetClock Do for You Spectracom NetClocks provide multiple outputs for use in networked devices and other pieces of technology A 1 Pulse Per Second 1PPS output acts as a precise metronome counting off seconds of UTC time A 10 MHz frequency reference provides a precise disciplined signal for control systems and clocks as the inverse of time is frequency IRIG output used in many military and some public safety and data centers provides a time code for time stamping of data as do the NetClock s serial time code outputs The NetClock s outputs are driven by its inputs specifically IRIG serial time code and most significantly Global Positioning System GPS technology GPS equipped NetClocks track up to twelve satellites simultaneously and synchronize to the satellite s atomic clocks This e
237. qJ SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations Search base for password aj I Enable SSL for simple authentication Server CA certificate verification level Select One x CA certificate for server certificate verification l Enable group based authentication Group to enforce membership of Group member attribute _ General setting Port for server binding 383 Default 389 for LDAP 636 for LDAPS Time limit for searching E Default 120 seconds Time limit for binding fizo Default 120 seconds LDAP protocol version LDAPV3 z Default LDAP V3 Scope to search server with l sub Default sub Submit Reset xl mo mee Am E e EANET Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation Al rights reserved Contact us htips 10 10 2 103 cgi bin showldapconfig cgi 10 10 2 103 amp Figure 3 84 Security LDAP Client Configuration Screen 2 of 2 If Enable SSL for simple authentication is not clicked clear text is sent to the LDAP server If SSL is checked text sent to the LDAP server is encrypted A sample configuration for an OpenLDAP server would be as follows DN for search base dc spectracomcorp dc com Bind DN cn manager dc spectracomcorp dc com Bind password test Search filter objectclass posixaccount Login attribute uid DN for password ou people dc spectracomcorp dc com one Group DN cn engineer ou group dc
238. r proper configuration If a modem configuration file is specified the ACTS Server will use the commands in that specified file to configure the modem rather than using its built in Hayes compatible commands Modem Speaker Clicking the appropriate radio button toggles the modem speaker on or off during dial out The ACTS Server Greeting Figure 7 5 accessible using the left hand menu is a message sent to a modem client when a connection is made The Acts Server Greeting screen allows the user to customize the greeting message for the specific application 76 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address https 10 10 50 20 cgi bin main cgi oO SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin ACTS Server Greeting Spectracom Corporation Telephone Time Service Submit Reset InTP interface systempRelay Securty Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Figure 7 5 ACTS Server Greeting 9300 Series The ACTS Server Statistics screen Figure 7 6 accessible using the left hand menu provides all data for the current day and the previous day For each day it shows the number of attempted and completed calls during each hour of that day This data is helpful in analyzing modem usage and balancing modem client call times NetClock Instruction Manual 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation e OSO e
239. racom shall have no liability or responsibility to the original customer or any other party with respect to any liability loss or damage caused directly or indirectly by any Spectracom product material or software sold or provided by Spectracom replacement parts or units or services provided including but not limited to any interruption of service excess charges resulting from malfunctions of hardware or software loss of business or anticipatory profits resulting from the use or operation of the Spectracom product or software whatsoever or howsoever caused In no event shall Spectracom be liable for any direct indirect special or consequential damages whether the claims are grounded in contract tort including negligence or strict liability EXTENDED WARRANTY COVERAGE Extended warranties can be purchased for additional periods beyond the standard five year warranty Contact Spectracom no later than the last year of the standard five year warranty for extended coverage SPECTRACOM 95 Methodist Hill Drive Rochester NY 14623 1 585 321 5800 FAX 1 585 321 5218 www spectracomcorp com sales spectracomcorp com This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses an
240. ration STRENGTH Signal strength value relative to the Signal to Noise Ratio SNR Range 0 255 the higher the number the greater the receiver signal NOTE The NTP Status screen Figure 3 106 is discussed in the Configuring NTP section of this manual Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer Elle Edit View Favorites Tools Help amp D SPECT RA COM You have logged in as admin NTP Status Offset Graph fo424 2006 gt Time Offset Frequency Offset L Retesh Graph is Jitter Status In Sync Stratum 1 Selected Reference Delay 0 000 mS Offset 0 017 mS Jitter 0 004 mS Time Offset Local Time Offset lt Seconds 1 1 1 10006 26006 30008 40000 50096 69008 79908 30000 Time Of Day UTC Seconds NTP Reference Status Auth Last Poll Delay Offset Jitter Sync Host Ref ID Stratum Mode Type Status Sec Taa Reach ms mS ms INTP interface ystem RelayfSecurit status amp Log Copyright 2008 Spectracom Corporation Alll rights reserved Manual Contact us internet Figure 3 106 NTP Status Screen The System Status screen Figure 3 107 consists of four sections that provide the user with the software revision levels the current time synchronization status the results of internal unit testing and the features and options that are currently enabled and disabled 3 126 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom
241. ration All rights reserved Contact us Done 10 10 128 59 4 Figure 7 16 Serial Port Configuration e The baud rate must be set to 9600 e The data format must be set to 02 e The request char must be set to Multicast e The system clock must be set to UTC 7 7 6 Rear Panel Connectors The IRIG B OUT IRIG E Out and Freaout tpesout Sur SERIAL FMTO9 ports are labeled on the S a AAN rear of the NetClock They replace the Gn om 7 IRIG OUT 1PPS IN and SERIAL fies lt COMM 2 ports on the rear panel of the NetClock SERIAL FMTO9 7 28 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 8 License Notices This file is automatically generated from html copyright htm Copyright Notice sheepb jpg Clone me says Dolly sheepishly The following copyright notice applies to all files collectively called the Network Time Protocol Version 4 Distribution Unless specifically declared otherwise in an individual file this notice applies as if the text was explicitly included in the file JO ISI IOI TO IOS ISIS IG IOI IOS IO IOS IG IOC OG IOI OI IOI IOI II IO ITI IO IOI IO II II Copyright c David L Mills 1992 2001 Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both the copyright notice and this permission noti
242. ratum 1 mode using a Stratum 0 reference such as GPS IRIG Modem or Serial Time Code Input For both NTP Peers and NTP Servers the Minimum and Maximum Poll rate for NTP packets can be configured Both NTP Peers and NTP Servers support either manually configured Symmetric Key ID Key string pairs or the use of Auto Key However these choices are mutually exclusive and must be identically configured on both the Netclock and the NTP Peer or NTP Server If the Symmetric Key ID Key string pair method is selected the Key ID must be first defined on the Symmetric Key page The entry for NTP Peer or NTP Server can be deleted by checking the Clear button and entering submit 3 22 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series Main Menu Mozilla Firefox lol x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help gt S oO htps 10 10 2 101 cgi bin main cgi Sla gt Glz Google q You have logged in as admin O SPECTRACOM Synchronizing Critical Operations NTP Peers NTP Peers may be specified in the following table to form a peer server group Servers in a peer group should each specify the other servers in the peer group When a server in the peer group loses sync with its primary reference it will choose another member of the peer group as backup dropping to one above the stratum level of the chosen peer Trusted Peer sym Ke ID IPv4 IPv6 Hostname Min Poll Max Poll Auto
243. reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Part 3 Cambridge Broadband Ltd copyright notice BSD Portions of this code are copyright c 2001 2003 Cambridge Broadband Ltd All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redi
244. resent The output is restored when the fault condition is corrected 90 to 240 VAC 47 to 63 Hz through an IEC 320 universal connector 9 5 to 30 VDC 18 watts through a CE UL CSA approved power adapter supplied NOTE Rubidium Option 04 uses a 24 VDC nominal 18 32 VDC 2 5 amps power supply Terminal Block 3 pin pluggable with screw locks 5 08 mm Negative shell positive center 1 5 13 Mechanical and Environmental Dimensions Weight Temperature Humidity 1 8 Designed for EIA 19 rack mount 16 75 W x 1 72 H 1U x 14 00 D actual 425 mm W x 44 mm H x 356 mm D actual 6 5 Ibs 2 95 kg with Rubidium option 6 0 Ibs 2 72 kg without 32 to 122 F 0 to 50 C operating range 40 to 185 F 40 to 85 C storage range 10 95 relative humidity non condensing NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation Model 9300 Series 2 Installation 2 1 Inspection On receipt carefully examine the carton and its contents CAUTION Electronic equipment is sensitive to Electrostatic Discharge ESD Observe all ESD precautions and safeguards when handling Spectracom equipment Verify that all material ordered has been received by checking the carton contents against the packing list If there is a discrepancy please contact Spectracom Customer Service at US 1 585 321 5800 If there is damage to the carton resulting in damage to the unit contact the carrier immediatel
245. rne ore d ioj x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help amp Address la https 10 10 50 20 cgi bin main cgi x co a z oO SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin ACTS Server Statistics Completed Calls Today Hour UTC of Calls Hour UTC of Calls Yesterday Hour UTC of Calls Hour UTC of Calls Attempted Calls Today Hour UTC of Calls Hour UTC 4 ER SE EIEN SCE SET Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Figure 7 6 ACTS Server Statistics The ACTS Server Log Figure 7 7 helps the user monitor the behavior of the ACTS server daemon including when it is started when it is stopped and how it is configured The log records information about each time message it sends to the modem client Data contained in the log is helpful in troubleshooting when there is a problem in communication between the ACTS server and modem client 7 8 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series Main Menu Mozilla Firefox lo x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help E gt S A O https 10 10 50 20 eg bin main cai S Gl scoate Is L Customize
246. rovides the NetClock with a self calibrating ovenized rubidium oscillator The purpose of this oscillator is to provide a very accurate time base when GPS is either lost or cannot be obtained due to site limitations It is also used to provide a very stabile and accurate 10 MHz output with a high degree of holdover if GPS is lost Because of its high degree of stability this oscillator provides the ability to greatly extend the hold over period when GPS is not present Extending the hold over period allows the unit to provide very accurate and useable time stamps and a 10 MHz output for a longer period of time once time synchronization has been lost NOTE The NetClock must be ordered with Option 04 installed at the time of the initial purchase This option cannot be added after the NetClock has been shipped from the factory The Rubidium oscillator is atomic in nature but requires no MSDS 7 2 1 Comparison of the Rubidium oscillator to the OCXO and standard TCXO oscillators 10 MHZ frequency output Rubidium oscillator Option 04 1x10 typical 24 hour average locked to GPS 1x10 per month typical aging unlocked OCXO oscillator Option 05 1x10 typical 24 hour average locked to GPS 2x10 per week typical aging unlocked TCXO oscillator Standard 1x10 typical 24 hour average locked to GPS Time drift while the NetClock is in Holdover mode Loss of primary backup reference Oscillator Option Estim
247. s currently in the holdover mode Lost external reference but the unit is still synchronized this field will show the number of days hours minutes and seconds that the unit has been in the holdover mode Elapsed time from the last good external reference If the unit is not currently in holdover mode because it either currently receiving an external reference or because the variable holdover period has expired and the unit is no longer synchronized the phrase Not In Holdover is displayed instead 3 4 13 Configuring 1PPS Input The NetClock supports an externally provided 1PPS signal which is supplied as a reference for improved accuracy during holdover The NetClock auto detects this signal on the 1PPS Input connector when provided and uses it to maintain time only when the primary time reference such as IRIG input has become unstable or is no longer available The 1PPS signal is also used between modem dial out adjustments When a stable 1PPS signal is connected to the NetClock it is recommended that the holdover timeout on the holdover setup page is adjusted to a value suitable to the desired accuracy for 1PPS source Oscillator Recommended Holdover Timeout TCXO 2 ppm 2 hours OCXO 02 ppm 24 hours NOTE Any externally provided 1pps signal should have a MINIMUM accuracy of 10ppm When the NetClock receives an externally provided 1PPS input this is indicated on the System Status page in Ti
248. s stubs to the RS 485 transmission line Stub lengths affect the bus impedance and capacitive loading which could result in reflections and signal distortion Terminate End Device NIP Time Server DISPLAY RS 232 9288 Time Server TimeView 230 RS 485 Terminal RS 485 Terminal In Out Block In Out Block Terminal Block RS 485 Time Data Bus NetClock Twisted Pair Cable RS 485 In Out Terminal Block RS 485 In Out Terminal RS 485 Block In Out Terminal Block Display RS 232 Digital Message Figure 2 8 One Way Bus Installation 2 14 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation Model 9300 Series The RS 485 Output can be split in a total of two directions as shown in Figure 2 9 This allows the NetClock to be centrally located Connecting in this method can simplify installation and possibly reduce the amount of cable required Terminate End Terminate End Device Device RS 232 NTP Time Server RS 232 DISPLAY ae TimeView 312 RS 485 Terminal In Out RS 485 In Out Display NetClock Instruction Manual Terminal RS 485 Block In Out TimeView 230 8179T TimeTap 9288 Time Server Terminal RS 485 Block In Out Terminal Block RS 485 Time Data Bus Twisted Pair Cable Terminal Block Terminal Block 8179T TimeTap NetClock RS 232 Figure 2 9
249. s red Year information consists of the last two digits of the current year i e 97 98 99 etc Elements 60 through 63 contain the binary equivalent of year units Elements 65 through 68 contain the binary equivalent of tens of years In keeping with IRIG formats the least significant bit occurs first All unused Control Functions are filled with a space Binary 0 SBS Word begins at index count 80 Seventeen Straight Binary Coded elements occur with a position identifier between the 9th and 10th binary coded elements Least significant digit occurs first 4 Pulse rates Element rate 100 per second Position identifier rate 10 per second Reference marker rate 1 per second 5 Element identification The on time reference point for all elements is the pulse leading edge 3 36 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series Index marker Binary 0 or uncoded element 2 millisecond duration Code digit Binary 1 5 millisecond duration Position identifier 8 millisecond duration Reference marker 1 per second The reference marker appears as two consecutive position identifiers The second position identifier marks the on time point for the succeeding code word 6 Resolution Pulse width coded signal 10 milliseconds Amplitude modulated signal 1 millisecond 7 Carrier frequency 1 kHz when modulated C F ELEMENT DIGIT FUNCTION 50 1 Space 51 2 Space 52 3 Space 53 4 Space 54 5 Space
250. s such as HTTPS or SSH or to operate in a less secure mode Main Menu Mozilla Firefox 5 x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help gt S amp o htps 10 10 2 103 cgi bin main cgi Sie gt Ge coogie qJ ele CT RA COM You have logged in as admin ynchronizing Critical Operations Hostname NetClock928305 al DNS Servers Primary DNS Server 10 11 10 Secondary DNS Server fi 0 1 1 30 IP v4 Configuration I Enable DHCP IP Address fo fo p fo Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 M Enable Gateway Gateway Address fio fio ff fi IP v6 Configuration Enable DHCP6 IP Address Prefix Length Delete fe80 230 64ff fe04 4aa3 64 m I Add a static IPv6 Address and Prefix Length IP Address Prefix Length Default Gateway x NTP interface System Relay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Done 10 10 2 103 Figure 3 71 Security Network Screen 1 of 2 NetClock Instruction Manual 3 79 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation From the Security Network screen Figure 3 71 the user may define the NetClock s host name The DNS servers are set automatically if using DHCP and manually if not using DHCP The same is true of the IP configuration Certain information that must be entered on this screen should be obtained from your network administrator if it is not automat
251. s warranted for one year from date of shipment and subject to the exceptions listed above The power adaptor if supplied is warranted for one year from date of shipment and subject to the exceptions listed above THE ANALOG CLOCKS ARE WARRANTED FOR ONE YEAR FROM DATE OF SHIPMENT AND SUBJECT TO THE EXCEPTIONS LISTED ABOVE THE TIMECODE READER GENERATORS ARE WARRANTED FOR ONE YEAR FROM DATE OF SHIPMENT AND SUBJECT TO THE EXCEPTIONS LISTED ABOVE The Rubidium oscillator if supplied is warranted for two years from date of shipment and subject to the exceptions listed above All other items and pieces of equipment not specified above including the antenna unit antenna surge suppressor and antenna preamplifier are warranted for 5 years subject to the exceptions listed above WARRANTY CLAIMS Spectracom s obligation under this warranty is limited to infactory service and repair at Spectracom s option of the product or the component thereof which is found to be defective If in Spectracom s judgment the defective condition in a Spectracom product is for a cause listed above for which Spectracom is not responsible Spectracom will make the repairs or replacement of components and charge its then current price which buyer agrees to pay Spectracom shall not have any warranty obligations if the procedure for warranty claims is not followed Users must notify Spectracom of the claim with full information as to the claimed defect
252. sity of California Berkeley and its contributors 4 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 7 Remaining components of the software are provided under a standard 2 term BSD licence with the following names as copyright holders Markus Friedl Theo de Raadt Niels Provos Dug Song Aaron Campbell Damien Miller Kevin Steves Daniel Kouril Per Allansson Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistribut
253. ssrrsrsssssnitetssnnrnntnnnnnnttntnnnntnntnnnanantntnanaaanaannanaatinnanaaannnnnanaatnnnanaannnt 2 8 Model 8227 GPS Inline Amplifier s sssssessssssssssrrssssrrssssrnssssrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrreennrreennt 2 9 Ethernet Network Cabling lt ccatsats cts cancecegiastaaracoachexiuaitaste tase nesteariaciataisesaessana Meteaameaa ela aaa EEEE EES 2 10 Optional CNC3000 Cable Kikai n aces ea eta rihanna hee ween el a 2 10 Remote Port and Serial Comm Port Output P in outs ANd Wiring scscsssestesssesessseesesessesseeesssseeeeseeeey 2 11 Senai ComM P ONS isiin eena a teat olen oeeeatutdaes ARE N NE 2 11 RS 485 REMOTE FOUL sity a E E Steely lalate beet A side yh E t 2 12 Remote Output SAGs cwniiusiain ndash antimony Mamta A 2 13 RS 485 Guidelines and Cable SelCHON ccc itscectnimnaceaina minaimaind auiwcimaivancwaimaunminndadt 2 13 GOIN C MOM T GC vat aczs caress Set tacts canis ts atetasacunse catddia tadandasssiasbacdncatis iyteasts sdenadhidieaisacatie a EE EEEE EEEE EEEa 2 14 Terminato pereeeerereeer epee corer ene ere aa rea trerrererri EE ere aN 2 18 PRODUCT CONFIGURATION 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000600 31 T Network Configuration with DEC Pos d a aca cas whdavasdestesusieras tasaieds wiaptadecteintidoabattacieead wbiartaiaicnaa nose teed 3 2 Initial Network CONfGUTA OIG aisscascasteacatetraracastissritiaraace da sea saad aiuindiseme donee ae Mita lees 3 5 Using HyperTerminal to Connect to the N tClO
254. ssssssnnrrnsnsnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnannnnnnnanannnnnnaanannnnnnnaannnnnna 3 80 Figure 3 13 Security SSH Screen Lof 2 ianeiieeii aiaa i 3 81 Figure 3 74 Security SSH Screen 2 of 2 ss sssssssssssssssininenssannnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnananannnnnnantnnnnnanannnnnnnaannnnnna 3 82 Figure 3 75 Security HTTPS Screen 1of2 sssssssssssssssssssssnnrrnsnsnrnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnanrinnnanannnnnnnnaarnnnnna 3 87 Figure 3 76 Security HTTPS Screen 2 of 2 scciendanc hentia finteiaascheneincdu dui dateasaaunetiene 3 88 Figure 3 77 Security User Account Screen sfeccescc tee acecenes ila edtet seeks laetecdecytubeesteehestacvededa tasbect alta arb eetanectilateeet 3 91 Figure 3 78 Security User Account Screen Assigning Privileges cessssesssesesstesesstsstestestesteetssneesesessnseetsneeesens 3 92 Pigure 3 79 SN MPS ecuriby Screen Lof 3 iriine ansi eae EAE tue ered 3 93 Figure 3 80 SNMP Security Screen 2 003 iscecatsiecnretean in ceayeas eorinnectas flat alaceelvelineds ia diate dean Naieess 3 94 Figure 3 81 SNMP Security Screen 3 0f3 cates ininscentnceincmnen adanieusnde kw aad weiaaie 3 95 Figure 3 82 Security LDAP General Screen ois cesccctaiepeaten dante a nanan dade Aiaenaenaneenaianics 3 96 Figure 3 83 Security LDAP Client Configuration Screen 1 Of 2 oc ececseesestssestsnestsestesnesttsneeiteneeitsneeeteneetens 3 97 Figure 3 84 Security LDAP Client Configuration Screen 2 Of 2 2 sss
255. ssssssssssssstssnssanttttnnninttnk Nanin unAn AAAA ANMANN AAAAAANANANEAAKANANEAKEANANANEEAKANA KEEKEEKE EEEE aaa 3 48 Figure 3 49 System GR 9 5 COON ea cot cats ces cca cents setts oe piece ace mneateataas aaterle tec estde Git mearaahe lasteduemustinea 3 50 Figure 3 50 System Time Screen aicesiscis7 tacceuschces Ne caateasas ucts ste auneecsstadlateeseds eihecsclecteeasletOh S lasauteatit ca tea ueeensttetuaigates 3 51 Figure 3 51 Local System Clock Screen 1 O13 essesi 3 52 Figure 3 52 Local System Clock Screen 2 OF 3 2 ssccctesiacteeas capi lacecinsiateataraetits Meleuntaadlitnanea Magers 3 53 Figure 3 53 Local System Clock Screen 3 of 3 dodanie Met Mee asada ated nee ate Naas 3 54 Figure 3 54 System Mode Screen s 3 csuiaditu annie Ane dd ae ane A sd Mn eters 3 59 Figure 3 55 System Update SCreem icccucsecks ce Seti ands acyaheieeenedigtaassienatuhreinen bated aigeinarbaadnenens 3 60 Figure 3 56 System Reboot Screen e ssessscsessscsessesessetessetesneeeesneeesnsesesneesesneesesneetesaeenseaeenseatenseatensetenseatenseatens 3 61 Figure 3 57 System Holdover SCreen Ss cccsteceeseect5 sss sevescckerstzss ounces tsb cadiasxesbdstasasgesstsetetibtedcasaen teabeeetbacsettceastitvctsaned 3 63 Figure 3 58 System Status Screen 1PPS Input Indicated 2 0 sesesssesescseseesseesesseeeesnseesnsestenseatsnsesesnsetensestans 3 65 Figure 3 59 Serial Time Code Setup Screen tates ceis cetcinvavie alsin daha anadin anu ehceite whe giieiees 3 6
256. sted symmetric keys to ensure that messages come from authenticated sources This does not encrypt NTP messages NetClock Instruction Manual 3 21 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation To require all requests for NTPDC or NTPQ to be authenticated over IPv4 or IPv6 enable Allow Queries from NTPDC or NTPQ over IPv4 or Allow queries from NTPDC or NTPQ over IPv6 The NTP Access grid on the NTP General screen allows the user to enable or disable all IPv4 and IPv6 requests as well as to allow or deny users or network segments Clicking the Auth Only box on each line where a user or network segment is defined will prompt the NetClock to accept only authenticated requests MD5 or Autokey from this user or network segment You may also specify options on a per client basis Instead of providing blanket access you may specify which IP Addresses or hostnames have access or restrict access for certain IP addresses or hostnames To allow access change the Type drop down to Allow for restriction to Deny Enter the appropriate hostname and IP Mask If you wish for the additional security of authorized access enable Auth Only To allow for queries enable Enable Query NOTE Changes to the NTP configuration may only occur while the NTP service is disabled From the NTP References screen Figure 3 28 the user may check the Enable Stratum 0 Reference box This makes the 9383 a Stratum 1 reference If
257. stributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE NetClock Instruction Manual 8 3 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Part 4 Sun Microsystems Inc copyright notice BSD Copyright 2003 Sun Microsystems Inc 4150 Network Circle Santa Clara California 95054 U S A All
258. svsdcvesdenstiese caves dass tins wndevtadans ind vades Wsoened widens dededwitveadnat acetals 3 18 Figure 3 24 Successtul Haltsun ainada EEA aiaa 3 18 Figure 3 25 Web UI Primary Menu sscve ssc aseacnsc tags teen oted chastatautsctad eassdataa mesvecnsaateiatactetad mats Or sssvfeenstanartama tenets 3 19 Figure 3 20 Web UINTP MENU ainena nanan aia aa 3 19 Figure 3 27 NTP General SPOS Mra icitaestoa dct exes teed soaresel css asastaacased thes tvedepsvoued cebusaatastuseas tes tvedcateds tur uesteavasnaitiy Nation 3 20 Figure 3 28 NTP References Screen 1 OF 2 acceva unneeded aan ete ath 3 23 Figure 3 29 NTP References Screen 2 of 2 in Meionrtistiatintitie diel ateinadie i eaenidneaiiaws 3 24 Figure 3 30 NTP Symmetrical Keys S Creen astiehaiescenstsedeiecn dean de nwetd annie dnin dete on wie 3 25 Figure 3 31 NTP Autokey Screen crass sitvactettindnwie ni anand einen aiaa aia E 3 26 Figure 3 32 Statistics FTP GCIEG MA cyccestscancaacehen teria aneasgrmautead ta iaiimdesniictatuttas ken etlandhentauihantiiniats 3 27 Figure Se 3 Sc NTP Status SICKO iriiria aena ea aeea ETELE ALE EN AAT TN 3 28 Figure 3 34 Interface MenU s s sssssesssrrrsnssrnonsnrnensnrnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnennnnnennnunennnnnennnnnnnnnnennnnensnnrennrnnensnrennrrnnnsrnnnarrrneant 3 29 Figure 3 35 Interface Serial P ort I STrEEN eect eer eatin enact a ati E 3 30 Figure 3 36 Interface Remote Port 2 Screen ssssssssssssississssannrrnsnnnrnnnnnnnnnnntnnnanannnnnnnnnnnnnnnanannnnnana
259. t Keys created at the factory The default key size for all key types is 1024 Host Key sizes can vary between 768 and 4096 bits The recommended key size is 1024 Though many key sizes are supported it is recommended that users select key sizes that are powers of 2 or divisible by 2 The most popular sizes are 768 1024 and 2048 Large key sizes up to 4096 are supported but may take ten minutes or more to generate Host Keys are generated in the background Creating RSA and DSA keys each with 1024 bits length typically takes about 30 seconds Keys are created in the order of RSA DSA and finally RSA1 When the keys are created you can successfully make SSH client connections If the unit is rebooted with Host Key creation in progress or the unit is booted and no host keys exist the key generation process is restarted The key generation process uses either the previously specified key sizes or if a key size is undefined it defaults to 1024 A key with a zero length or blank key size field is not created Note also that when you delete a Host Key and recreate a new one SSH client sessions will warn you that the host key has changed for this particular IP address The user will either have to override the warning and accept the new Public Host Key and start a new connection or they may need to remove the old Host Public Key from their client system and accept the new Host Public Key Please consult your specific SSH client s software s documentat
260. t Successful Table box Figure 3 24 will display to indicate that the Halt request to shut down the NetClock has been accepted Wait 30 seconds before removing power 3 18 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 3 4 Product Configuration using the WEB UI With the NetClock connected to the network you may configure it change its operating settings check its status and generate reports from the Web UI as needed and desired All Web UI screens are accessible through the menu at the bottom of the screen which is displayed after a successful login These screens their functions and example configurations where applicable are presented in this section NOTE At any time during configuration in the Web UI click Submit to save the settings or Reset to restore the settings to their previous state Interface SystemJRelay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Figure 3 25 Web UI Primary Menu 3 4 1 Configuring NTP The NTP menu groups the NetClock s NTP configuration and reporting functions Figure 3 26 From this menu the user may access the NTP General References Symmetrical Keys Autokey and Status screens Main Menu Mozilla Firefox 10 x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help B k hy https 10 10 2 103 cgi bin main cgi SM gt Gly Google oF D SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin
261. t way to remotely update application software in that the unit will automatically execute the most recent image in sys bin help reboot This command is used to immediately reboot a unit The app option is used to restart the application Normally the unit reboots to the application unless the optional parameter is specified to bootloader which it will reboot to the bootloader USAGE reboot app app Reboot to application NetClock Instruction Manual 6 1 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation NOTE Do not reboot the unit while file uploads are in progress Do not reboot the unit with non application images are located in sys bin If either of these conditions is not fulfilled the unit may fail to boot the application image which could result in a unit that function incorrectly or not at all 6 3 log help log Use the log command to access and manage the log system USAGE log COMMAND OBJECT HANDLE COMMAND show Shows the contents of a log get Gets the record HANDLE from a log OBJECT j Journal log a Alarm log g GPS qualification Log fe Operational log x Oscillator log d Dialout log n NTP log r Event relay log t Authorization log u Update log HANDLE Record number to access The first record is 0 6 4 option help option The option commands provide a means to set clear and display product configuration options USAGE option COMMAND OPTION PRODUCT VALUE
262. te Day 271 of year 2001 Time 12 45 36 UTC time Standard time is in effect NetClock Instruction Manual 59 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 5 7 Format 8 Format 8 includes a time synchronization status character the four digit year day of year time reflecting Time Zone Offset and DST corrections when enabled Format 8 also includes the DST Standard Time indicator and the Time Zone Offset value Format 8 data structure is shown below CRLF I YYYY DDD HH MM SS D XX CR LF or CRLF I YYYY DDD HH MM SS D XX CR LF where CR Carriage Return LF Line Feed Time Sync Status space YYYY Four digit year indication A Space separator DDD Day of Year 001 366 HH Hours 00 23 Colon separator MM Minutes 00 59 SS Seconds 00 60 D Daylight Saving Time indicator S 1 D 0 XX Time Zone Switch Setting 00 to 12 The leading edge of the first character CR marks the on time point of the data stream Time sync status character is described below space when the NetClock is synchronized to UTC source when the NetClock time is set manually when the NetClock has not achieved or has lost synchronization to UTC source The time and date can be set to either local time or UTC time depending upon the configuration of the output port 5 10 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 5 8 Format 90 Format 90 provides a position data stream in NMEA 0183 G
263. tem clocks C Weekly Every D weeks On E MON F TUE F WED C THU C FRI C SAT F SUN At o 00 utc z Click here to edit or create local system clocks Interface System Relay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us Figure 7 8 System Modem Dial Out Screen 1 of 2 To help prevent a loss of time synchronization condition from occurring the call interval should be configured for a value of less than the holdover period This will prevent the holdover period from expiring which will cause loss of Time Sync because the modem was configured to dial out after the holdover expired For example if the holdover period is set for two weeks the call interval should be set to dial out less than every two weeks Otherwise holdover will expire before the modem is scheduled for a dial out and time synchronization will be lost Boot This field specifies how long the modem software will wait after being powered up to check the unit s time synchronization status If this time expires and the unit has not achieved time synchronization yet the modem software will automatically dial out with the current settings at that time Note that changes to this timer s settings will not change the timeout of the current countdown if it has already begun e g If the timer is set to 1 hour and then rebooted the unit will countdown to 1 hour at power up Changing the timer s settings
264. terface with the unit The modem operation will not be available while selected to this mode Client Mode In this mode Figure 7 3 the Serial Setup port can be connected to a modem for dialing out The Serial Setup port will be unavailable for network configuration while in this mode NOTE lf the NetClock is switched repeatedly between Console and Client modes the modem application may stop functioning Reboot the NetClock to clear this condition ACTS Server Mode This mode Figure 7 4 configures the NetClock to answer telephone calls using the modem when connected to an analog telephone line The modem connects to the NetClock in the same manner as for Client mode NOTE Click Submit to apply the change to the modem mode Return to Modem Configuration to access the screen options for Client mode Main Menu Mozilla Firefox d l01 x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help E gt A https 10 10 50 20 cgi bin main cgi S z amp G coosle 4 LI Customize Links _ Free Hotmail Windows Marketplace Windows Media Windows D SPECTITRACOM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations System time is significantly less accurate when time is obtained from Modem Dial Out The Command Line Interface console on the Serial Setup Port will be inaccessible while in client or server mode All other modem options will be disabled when in console mode Port Mode
265. tfsystemObjsInfo TineDav m H E tfRefReceiver gt H 0 tfInterface ieie is B tfRelayEventobjs TimeMinute 21 H E tfLocalClockobjs TimeSecond 23 H E tfNtpobjs NO M 5 0 ntpv4mib TestCount HALT specTimeFreqEvents None a E tEventsv2Info YES H E specTimeviewMIB H E snmpv2 fanmo Map Mib Trend Event Menu For Help press F1 localhost Administrator Supervisor f I Figure 3 21 Reboot MIB Location Options SNMP 3 16 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series To reboot or halt the NetClock through SNMP Spectracom provides a REBOOT MIB option This is found in the tfSsytemObjsInfo table in the Spectracom Time and Frequency MIB under Spectracom Products specProduct specTimeFreqMIB in the specTimeFreqObjs under tfSystemObjs in the table tfSystemObjsinfo The REBOOT option Figure 3 22 provides the choices of NO or YES for Reboot and Halt to initiate a shut down request ieiz File Edit view Insert Manage Tools Config Window Help AS asa DQ OAE ESA 0101223 Z JtiSystemObisinfo z ap snmp Mibs x PA aE vix fo Alean H sec SS private ir 00 000 00 04 28 a CastleRock f lanmanager spectracom AppName Sy specReg TEEF H specModules H E specTimeFreqProducts PDS B specProducts UN B specTimeFreqMiB SyncStat_ H E specTimeFreqConfs specTimeFreqObjs ModemStat B tfsystemobjs E E tfsysTestTable E tfSystemObjsInfo H E tfRefReceiver H E tfinterface H E tfRelayEventObjs E E tflocalclockobjs
266. the DHCP server assigns a new IP address to the NetClock Verify your setup before synchronizing the network PCs via NTP Synchronize the network PCs via NTP using the Ethernet port as desired Refer to www spectracomcorp com for assistance and refer to Table 2 1 for information regarding local time Review your security configuration settings NetClock Instruction Manual 2 3 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation Data Output Port Available From Time Zone Automatic Additional Notes Offset for Local Daylight Saving Time Time Adjustment Capable Network Time Ethernet port on front panel NOT AVAILABLE NO NTP is always UTC Must set Protocol NTP Local time DST correction on each PC via the Date Time properties window Data Format 0 Remote Serial on rear panel 00 23 Hours YES None Data Format 1 Remote Serial on rear panel 12 00 YES None Data Format 2 Remote Serial on rear panel NOT AVAILABLE NO Data Format 2 always reflects UTC It can t be configured as local time Data Format 3 Remote Serial on rear panel 12 00 YES None Data Format 4 Remote Serial on rear panel NOT AVAILABLE NO Data Format 4 always reflects UTC It can t be configured as local time Data Format 5 Remote Serial on rear panel 12 00 YES None Data Format 7 Remote Serial on rear panel NOT AVAILABLE NO Data Format 7 always reflects UTC It can t be configured as local time Data
267. the year field will be ignored Valid year must be later than the year 1980 and earlier than year 2038 Submit Reset NTP interface System Relay Security Status amp Lod Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us Done i internet Figure 3 59 Serial Time Code Setup Screen NOTE When the year is updated the NTP server must be restarted from the NTP Web UI page or the NetClock rebooted for the new year value to take effect 3 66 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 3 4 15 Configuring System Logs From the System Log Configuration screen Figure 3 60 the user may configure remote Syslog servers with which the NetClock will communicate Facilities and severities are defined by the Syslog server and must be set up in the NetClock to match The IP addresses and host names of the Syslog servers are entered on the bottom portion of the screen Figure 3 61 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Address http 10 10 2 102 cgi bin main cgi D SPECTRACOM You have logged in as admin ynchronizing Critical Operations Syslog Configuration Enable Log Name Local Facility Severity Local File Name Log system v flocal z emerg z flog spectracom system log events Vv local alert z flog spectracom events log alarms Vv flocal x crit z
268. tion sections to reflect changes in firmware version 3 4 3 Spectracom Corporation 95 Methodist Hill Drive Rochester NY 14623 www spectracomcorp com Phone US 1 585 321 5800 Fax US 1 585 321 5219
269. titude and Longitude coordinates below After the unit has established its location any changes to these values will be ignored unless the stored GPS position is cleared Latitude North Latitude z Degrees j3 Minutes B Seconds 50 Longitude West Longitude z Degrees 77 Minutes fs Seconds j3 Submit Reset a interface System Relay Security Status 8 Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Contact us Done 10 10 2 101 amp Figure 3 49 System GPS Screen 3 50 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series DELETE POSITION AND RESTART GPS SELF SURVEY The user may delete the NetClock s GPS position and restart the GPS Self Survey on command To ensure that no trace of position data remains on the unit perform the following steps e Disconnect the NetClock s GPS antenna e Using the mouse click the check box marked Clear saved GPS position Then click the Submit button The NetClock will initiate a GPS self survey 3 4 8 Configuring System Time and Local Clocks The System Time screen Figure 3 50 allows the user to set the system time manually for test purposes or if there is no external time reference available Setting the system time when the NetClock is connected to an external time reference will result in the external reference for example GPS overriding the manually set time The user may also view or change the number of leap seconds dif
270. to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Part 2 Networks Associates Technology Inc copyright notice BSD Copyright c 2001 2003 Networks Associates Technology Inc All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must
271. transmits information regarding a Leap second adjustment at a specific Time and Date an arbitrary number of months in advance 2 Modem Applicable to only units with Option 03 Modem installed During a modem dial out call the call service indicates that a Leap second adjustment at the end of this current calendar month will occur 4 2 2 Leap Second Alert Notification The NetClock will announce a pending Leap Second adjustment by the following methods 1 Data Formats 2 and 7 on the Serial and Remote Ports contain a Leap Second indicator During the entire calendar month preceding a Leap Second adjustment these Formats indicate that at the end of the current month a Leap Second Adjustment will be made by having a L rather than a space character in the data stream Note that his does not indicate the direction of the adjustment as adding or removing seconds These formats always assume that the Leap Second will be added not removed 2 NTP Packets contain two Leap Indicator Bits In the 24 hours preceding a Leap Second Adjustment the Leap Indicator Bits 2 bits which normally are 00b for sync are 01b 1 for Add a Leap Second and 10b 2 for remove a Leap Second The bit pattern 11b 3 indicates out of sync and in this condition NTP does NOT indicate Leap seconds The Sync state indicates leap seconds by indicating sync can be 00b 01b or 02b NOTE It is the responsibility of the client software utilizing either the Dat
272. tvebesnsant te asentncoapeel eatasinetayamastndoeindaagen 2 18 Figure 3 1 Entering to the Configuration in the Web Ul ss sssssssssssssssssrrssssrnsssnrnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnennnre 3 1 Figure 3 2 Web Browser User Interface Web Ul ssessssessessessteetestseteseestesseetesseeteseeteseeeesseetesneetesteaseeatensestanses 3 2 Figure 3 3 Security Network Screen 1 of 2 eccrscccnncnenicsnncnininnnninininninininin 3 3 Figure 3 4 Security Network Screen 2 Of 2 esesssessscsssssstsstssteseeetesteetesneeteseeteeseenseseenseatenseaeenseatenseatenseatensestenses 3 4 Figure 3 5 Establishing a New Terminal Connection cccssesesesesessessesessessssssessesssesussssssssuseessssnseesnsseeeesnsenseeress 3 5 Figure 3 6 Connecting to the Computer s Serial POM scceisscsccgeecaesstsncstcaseeessts cassesesestseiihetasdittanaenetacadieieeantiteanitinns 3 6 Figure 3 7 Configuring the Serial Port Connection Properties cssssssessssessessesscssssesesssssessesssuesessssussnsssenseeenssneeeeess 3 6 Figure 3 8 Spectracom NetClock Command Line Interface CLI 3 7 Figure 3 9 Available CLI Commands visiirisi iriiria uel ed anon ca eins 3 7 Figure 3 10 Serial Port Pin Configuration ssuieehciitimidainsaavaitaishaniniedunimnndeionitailananednen ait 3 8 Figure 3 11 Net Omit Si seesee senha ces che che a cere ccacesrawys fecael ec asecdevua tauteavs riction aantaceptiastataytenas reed 3 9 Figure 3 12 Prompt for Initial Configuration
273. uired for both incoming and outgoing packets Security protection may also be applied to incoming packets only or to outgoing packets only from the drop down list Select Ipsec to use IPSec as the security policy You may also select None or Discard Selecting None means that IPSec operation will not take place on the packet while selecting Discard means the packet matching indexes will be discarded You may choose to check either or both AH and ESP to set them as Require Use Default or Unique e Default means the kernel consults the system wide default for the protocol specified e Use means the kernel uses an SA if it is available while the kernel keeps normal operation otherwise e Require means an SA is required whenever the kernel sends a packet matched with the policy e Unique is the same as Require but allows the policy to match the unique outbound SA NetClock Instruction Manual 3 111 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 3 4 23 Logs and Status Reporting 4 Main Menu Microsoft Internet Explorer lol x Eile Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address E http 10 10 2 102 cgi bin main cgi Go E z O PECTRACOM You have logged in as admin ynchronizing Critical Operations NTP interface System Relay Security status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us internet Figure 3 93 Status and Log Menu The Status and Lo
274. ure 2 9 In a split bus configuration terminate the devices installed on each end of the bus Some Spectracom products include a built in termination switch to terminate the RS 485 bus when required or a resistor is supplied with the equipment if no termination switch is available The terminating resistor is installed between the positive and negative connections on the terminal block of the last RS 485 connection 2 18 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 3 Product Configuration NOTE Screens shown in this manual are for illustrative purposes Actual screens may vary Software common to multiple NetClock models may be used to generate these screens As a result labels in the screens displayed may refer to units other than your specific NetClock Software operation should be common among these models where appropriate After installing the NetClock verify that power is connected and wait for the device to boot up The front panel display provides certain configuration data on start up The right panel by factory default displays the date and time UTC The left panel displays the unit s hostname IPv4 address mask and gateway NOTE lf using DHCP the IP address will be assigned automatically and displayed on the front panel You may use a Web browser to connect to this IP address and configure the NetClock through the Web Browser User Interface Web Ul Figure 3 1 Refer to Network Configuration with
275. use SSH and HTTPS keys must be regenerated 3 4 12 Configuring System Holdover The user may set the system holdover from the System Holdover screen Figure 3 57 The time interval between the loss of the primary external reference and the moment that the NetClock declares loss of time synchronization is known as holdover While the unit is in holdover mode the time outputs are derived from an internal oscillator Because of the internal oscillator accurate time can still be derived even after the primary reference is removed The more stable the oscillator is without an external reference the longer this holdover period can be The benefit of holdover is that time synchronization and the availability of the time outputs is not immediately lost when the reference is no longer available The NetClock has a user configurable variable holdover period so that it can be adjusted for personal requirements and desires A user can change the length of time that a unit waits in the holdover mode before loss of time synchronization The holdover can be defined by a specific number of hours to wait such as 4 hours and 30 minutes It can also be defined by the estimated error However the estimated error feature is only enabled for the OCXO Option 05 and Rubidium Option 04 products The estimated error rates for each oscillator are listed below These are used when displaying the current estimated error for the user and when calculating a new holdover le
276. use when generating the key pair 3 104 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series Alternatively you may generate elsewhere and upload to the NetClock your key pair s Specify the directory and the name of the key pairs uploaded to it Regardless of the method used however you must upload the peer s public key to the NetClock and provide the directory and file name to the NetClock in the IPSec IKE SA Configuration screen 3 4 22 6 2 IKE Phase 2 Configuration Life Time defines how long an IPSec SA will be used Encryption Algorithm defines the group used for Diffie Hellman exponentiations This directive must be defined using one of the following Group 1 Modp768 Group 2 Modp1024 Group 5 Modp1536 Grouip 14 Modp2048 NOTE When using Aggressive mode the DH group defined for each proposal must be the same Encryption Algorithm specifies the algorithm used for Phase 2 Select DES 3DES AES used with ESP or NULL as desired or as required by your network administrator Authentication Algorithm defines another algorithm used for Phase 2 Select HMAC SHA1 or HMAC MD5 as desired or required Compression Algorithm defaults to deflate It is not configurable at this time NOTE After completing and submitting changes in the IPSec IKE SA Configuration screen check to make sure IPSec is enabled and IKE is selected for use with IPSec The IKE Log refer to Logs and Status Reporting is helpful in
277. ut OCXO oscillator Option 05 1x10 typical 24 hour average locked to GPS 2x10 per week typical aging unlocked Rubidium oscillator Option 04 1x10 typical 24 hour average locked to GPS 1x10 per month typical aging unlocked TCXO oscillator Standard 1x10 typical 24 hour average locked to GPS Time Drift while the NetClock is in Holdover mode Loss of primary backup reference Oscillator Option Estimated Error Rates Time to reach 2 ms OCXO Option 05 72 microseconds hour nominal 28 hours Rubidium Option 04 0 18 microseconds hour nominal 463 days TCXO Standard 1 0 milliseconds hour nominal 2 hours typical TCXO Standard 7 2 milliseconds hour worst case 17 minutes 7 20 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series 7 4 Option 06 IRIG Input Spectracom NetClock units equipped with Option 06 support IRIG input 7 4 1 IRIG Input Specifications Signal IRIG B amplitude modulated sine wave AM or pulse width coded DCLS Differential AM Carrier IRIG B 1000 Hz AM Signal Level 500mvV to 10V p p Modulated 2 1 to 6 1 DCLS Signal Level gt 10k ohms RS 485 or TTL with DCLS IRIG IN connected to ground Connector AM BNC female DCLS RS 485 DB9 female IRIG Code Format Provided Code Description B000 IRIG B TTL BCD CF and SBS B120 IRIG B AM 1 kHz BCD CF and SBS Center Pin IRIG HI NC Ground Gr
278. ver and that they were not tampered with during transmission To use the MD5 authentication with trusted key ID both the NTP client and the NetClock must contain the same key ID key string pair and the client must be set to use one of these MD5 pairs The key ID must be a number between 1 and 65532 the key string must be readable ASCII and between 1 and 16 characters long Duplicate key IDs are not permitted NTP requests received by the NTP server that do not contain an authenticator containing a valid Key ID and MD5 message digest pair will be responded to but no authentication will be performed NTP requests with valid authenticator result in a valid NTP response with its own valid authenticator using the same Key ID provided in the NTP request NTPDC and NTPQ are utilities for controlling NTP servers and gathering performance data from NTP servers NetClock firmware 3 4 3 has facilities to allow these tools to gather performance data Modification or control of a NetClock s NTP service through NTPDC or NTPQ is not supported If you would like to allow any NTPDC or NTPQ client access over IPv4 enable Allow Queries from NTPDC or NTPQ over IPv4 If you would like this for IPv6 NTPDC or NTPQ enable Allow queries from NTPDC or NTPQ Authentication is the use of some cryptographic technology to ensure that messages sent between computers are unaltered and emanate from a legitimate source NTP can use MD5 hashes along with tru
279. vice using Account Password authentication sftp scp 10 10 200 5 scp 10 10 200 135 s password admin123 Always use same password as admin sftp gt The user is presented with the SFTP prompt allowing interactive file transfer and directory navigation 4 Perform an SFTP file transfer from the device using Public Key with Passphrase authentication sftp i id_rsa scpo 10 10 200 5 Enter passphrase for key id_rsa mysecretpassphrase sftp gt The user is presented with the SFTP prompt allowing interactive file transfer and directory navigation NOTE Use of SCP and SFTP is restricted to the administrator To access SCP enter the account name SCP with your administrator password For SFTP the account name is SCP NetClock Instruction Manual 3 85 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 3 4 17 3 Recommended SSH Client Tools Spectracom does not make specific recommendations as to which specific SSH client SCP client or SFTP client tools However there are many SSH based tools available at cost or free to the user Two good free examples of SSH tool suites are the command line based OpenSSH running on a Linux or OpenBSD x86 platform and the excellent and free putty SSH tool suite The OpenSSH tool suite in source code form is freely available at www openSSH org though you must also provide an OpenSSL library which can be found at www openssl org The putty SSH tools and instructions regarding their use can be found at
280. y Retain the carton and packing materials in the event the carrier wishes to witness the shipping damage Failing to report shipping damaging immediately may forfeit any claim against the carrier In addition notify Spectracom Corporation of shipping damage or shortages in order to obtain a replacement or repair services NOTE lf equipment is returned to Spectracom it must be shipped in its original packing material Save all packaging material for this purpose 2 1 1 Inventory Your Spectracom time server package ships with the following components LJ unit LJ User manual E CE UL approved power supply for international use Ll Standard DB9F to DB9M RS 232 cable pinned as straight thru used for initial configuration O ac power cord L Rack mount kit LI Rubber footpads for desktop installation L 3 pin terminal block connector for RS 485 connections E 10 pin terminal block connector C Jeweler s type screwdriver for tightening the screws on the terminal blocks L Terminating Resistors 1209 Spectracom models that have the modem dial out feature Option 03 ship with a serial modem kit NetClock Instruction Manual 2 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation 2 2 Summary This section provides an overview summary of the installation process The installation of the NetClock consists of the following steps Refer to the table of contents in this manual for specific section references detailing how these summarized steps are accom
281. y defined by region Manually defined by week and day Manually defined by month and day No DST Rule Always Standard Time When this option is selected the NetClock will not observe DST time changes Automatically Configure to Unit s Physical Locality When this option is selected the NetClock software will observe and implement DST time changes automatically based on the unit s physical location as determined by GPS positioning Once this option has been selected and submitted the NetClock software will determine the values for the appropriate manual fields These manual definitions will be displayed when the defined clock is edited Manually Defined by Region From this dropdown box the user may select commonly defined geographic regions that share DST rules There may be exceptions based on your location The options include the following e Europe USA thru 2006 USA post 2006 Australia 1 Australia 2 Select Europe if your location complies with the European DST Rule This rule differs from all other rules because the DST changes occur based on UTC time not local time All time zones in Europe change for DST at precisely the same time relative to UTC rather than offset by local time zone Select USA thru 2006 if your location complies with the USA DST Rule and it is not yet the year 2007 The USA DST Rule changes in 2007 NOTE If you set your DST rule in 2006 you must change it manually on January 1 2007 Select
282. y operation of all three relays can be tested at any time as desired To test the relay operation login as administrator mode and click on test relays in the left orange bar Chose the desired relay to be tested and then press submit The selected relay should activate each time the Submit button is pushed NetClock Instruction Manual 3 69 9300 Series Spectracom Corporation NOTE A single relay can only be assigned one function but a function can be assigned to multiple relays By default all three relays are assigned Major Alarm z osoft Internet Explore x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay D SPECIEAGC OM You have logged in as admin Synchronizing Critical Operations Major Alarm Minor Alarm Event Timer Relay 1 e Relay 2 Relay 3 Submit MA SE E N SET Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Manual Contact us internet Figure 3 63 Relay Output Screen The Event Timer Relay screen Figure 3 64 and the Relay Current Event Scheduler screen Figure 3 66 allow for the configuration of 128 events that can turn on or off any one of the event timer relays Make sure the rear panel relay that is going to be associated with an event is configured to be the event timer relay in order to use this feature If any events are already configured they will be displayed by event number There are no requirements on the order of the events each o
283. y setting enabled Enable Gateway setting yes no Gateway settings enabled Current Gateway Address 10 2 1 1 Enter new Gateway Address Keeping Gateway Address 10 2 1 1 IPv6 CONFIGURATION Current DHCP6 setting enabled Enable DHCP6 setting yes no DHCP6 settings enabled Current IPv6 Default Gateway Enter new IPv6 Default Gateway Keeping IPv6 Default Gateway Keep static IPv6 address fe8 230 64ff fe 4 4a86 64 yes no Connected 0 03 45 Auto detect 9s008 N 1 SCROLL CAPS num Capture Print echo Figure 3 13 Initial Configuration using the CLI 3 10 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series ecomm1 HyperTerminal loj x Eile Edit View Call Transfer Help Current Gateway setting enabled Enable Gateway setting yes no Gateway settings enabled Current Gateway Address 10 2 1 1 Enter new Gateway Address Keeping Gateway Address 10 2 1 1 IPv6 CONFIGURATION Current DHCP6 setting enabled Enable DHCP6 setting yes no DHCP6 settings enabled Current IPv6 Default Gateway Enter new IPv6 Default Gateway Keeping IPv6 Default Gateway Keep static IPv6 address fe8 230 64ff fe4 4a86 64 yes no Keeping static IPv6 address fe8 230 64ff fe4 4a86 64 Add static IPv6 Address lt enter gt for none Network configuration successful admin 1 2 128 14 gt Connected 0 04 04 autodetect o600 s w 1 SCROLL CAPS NUM
284. ynchronizing Critical Operations SNMP Agent Enabled Disabled Individual Trap Enable Disable M Enable Power On Self Test POST Trap M Enable Time Synchronization Trap M Enable Holdover Trap M Enable Reboot Trap F Authentication Error Trap M Enable GPS Receiver Fault Trap M Enable GPS Antenna Problem Trap M Enable Minimum Satellites Trap M Enable Modem Time Synchronization Trap M Enable Modem Dialout Failure Trap M Enable Oscillator Adjustment Required Trap M Enable Frequency Error Trap Submit NTP interface System Relay Security Status amp Log Copyright 2006 Spectracom Corporation All rights reserved Menu Contact us Figure 3 46 System SNMP Screen SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is a set of standards for managing network devices which includes a protocol a database structure specification and a set of data objects The communication protocol involves one or more network management stations monitoring one or more network devices SNMP enabled devices must have an SNMP agent application that is capable of handling network management functions requested by a network manager The agent is also responsible for controlling the database of control variables defined in the produc s Management Information Base MIB Click the radio buttons at the top of the System SNMP screen Figure 3 46 to enable or disable SNMP You may also check the boxes to enable or disable individual traps
285. ynchronizing Critical Operations IPsec Service Enabled Disabled Security Association Using IKE Manually Configure Security Policy Source IP Destination IP Protocol Level Level DO JE a Require M Require a Requie 7 Require EE Requie 7 Require D E av Require 1 M Require CO JE A Require 7 Require DO E A Require C Require C wA Requie 1 M Require Fav Require 7 Require fan Require 7 Require fan Require M Require wE Require C Require DO E A Require C Require DO E A Require 1 7 Require DO E A Require C Require aE Require C Require NTP interface System Relay Security Status amp Log Copyright IDs Spectracem Comporation ail right resened Contact us Done 10 10 2103 amp 4 Figure 3 92 IPSec General Screen 3 110 NetClock Instruction Manual Spectracom Corporation 9300 Series Select ANY as the desired protocol to apply for IPSec security protection unless a specific protocol is desired these can be selected from the drop down list NOTE When using IKE over IPv6 do NOT select ANY There are protocols that do not work well with IKE under IPv6 with IKE Select one of the specific protocols listed in the dropdown menu as desired or required Select Both for the Direction which means IPSec security protection is req

NETCLOCK TIME SERVER 9300 SERIES

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents